MELSEC iQ-F

FX5 User's Manual (Temperature Control)

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Read these precautions before use.)
Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full
attention to safety in order to handle the product correctly.
This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories: [ WARNING] and [ CAUTION].

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

WARNING death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

CAUTION minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by [ CAUTION] may also cause severe injury.
It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety.
Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be read whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.

[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Make sure to set up the following safety circuits outside the PLC to ensure safe system operation
even during external power supply problems or PLC failure. Otherwise, malfunctions may cause
serious accidents.
- Most importantly, set up the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock
circuit for opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit to
prevent damage (to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
- Note that when the CPU module detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-
diagnosis, all outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the CPU
module occurs in an input/output control block, output control may be disabled. External circuits
and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
- Note that when an error occurs in a relay, transistor or triac of an output circuit, the output might
stay on or off. For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and
mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
● In an output circuit, when a load current exceeding the current rating or an overcurrent caused by a
load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an
external safety circuit, such as a fuse.
● Construct an interlock circuit in the program so that the whole system always operates on the safe
side before executing the control (for data change) of the PLC in operation.
Read the manual thoroughly and ensure complete safety before executing other controls (for program
change, parameter change, forcible output and operation status change) of the PLC in operation.
Otherwise, the machine may be damaged and accidents may occur due to erroneous operations.
● Do not write any data to the "system area" and "write-protect area" of the buffer memory in the
module. Executing data writing to the "system area" or "write protect area" may cause malfunction of
the programmable controller alarm. For the "system area" or "write-protect area", refer to Page 99
Buffer Memory Areas.

1
 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● When an inductive load such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve is controlled, a large current
(approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on.
Take proper measures so that the flowing current dose not exceed the value corresponding to the
maximum load specification of the resistance load.
● Simultaneously turn on and off the power supplies of the CPU module and extension modules.

[INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring
work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
● This product is an open type device that must be installed and used within a control cabinet which
satisfies all of the following three requirements.
- a cabinet which has conductivity.
- a cabinet which has a structure to prevent the fire to spread outside the cabinet.
- a cabinet which has sufficient mechanical strength.
● Use the product within the generic environment specifications described in the User's Manual
(Hardware) of the CPU module used.
Never use the product in areas with excessive dust, oily smoke, conductive dusts, corrosive gas (salt
air, Cl2, H2S, SO2 or NO2), flammable gas, vibration or impacts, or expose it to high temperature,
condensation, or rain and wind.
If the product is used in such conditions, electric shock, fire, malfunctions, deterioration or damage
may occur.

2
[INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Do not touch the conductive parts of the product directly. Doing so may cause device failures or
malfunctions.
● When drilling screw holes or wiring, make sure that cutting and wiring debris do not enter the
ventilation slits of the PLC. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
● For the product supplied together with a dust proof sheet, the sheet should be affixed to the ventilation
slits before the installation and wiring work to prevent foreign objects such as cutting and wiring
debris.
However, when the installation work is completed, make sure to remove the sheet to provide
adequate ventilation. Failure to do so may cause fire, equipment failures or malfunctions.
● Install the product on a flat surface. If the mounting surface is rough, undue force will be applied to the
PC board, thereby causing nonconformities.
● Install the product securely using a DIN rail or mounting screws.
● Work carefully when using a screwdriver such as installation of the product. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the product or accidents.
● Connect the extension cables, peripheral device cables, input/output cables and battery connecting
cable securely to their designated connectors. Loose connections may cause malfunctions.
● Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so
may cause device failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, expansion board, expansion adapter, and connector conversion adapter
- Extension modules, bus conversion module, and connector conversion module
- Battery

[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
WARNING
● Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring
work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
● Make sure to attach the terminal cover, provided as an accessory, before turning on the power or
initiating operation after installation or wiring work. Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
● Don't use the input terminals for measurement on a main circuit, since those terminals have no
measurement category.
● The temperature rating of the cable should be 80 or more.
● Make sure to properly wire to the spring clamp terminal block in accordance with the following
precautions. Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire
breakage, malfunctions, or damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Twist the ends of stranded wires and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly
stressed.

3
 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Perform class D grounding (grounding resistance: 100  or less) of the grounding terminal on the
CPU module and extension modules with a wire 2 mm2 or thicker.
Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems (Page 73 Grounding).
● Connect the power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual. If an AC power
supply is connected to a DC input/output terminal or DC power supply terminal, the PLC will burn out.
● Do not wire vacant terminals externally. Doing so may damage the product.
● Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to terminal blocks, power connectors, I/O
connectors, communication connectors, or communication cables. Failure to do so may result in wire
damage/breakage or PLC failure.
● Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or
accidents due to malfunction of the PLC caused by abnormal data written to the PLC due to the
effects of noise:
- Do not bundle the power line, control line and communication cables together with or lay them
close to the main circuit, high-voltage line, load line or power line. As a guideline, lay the power
line, control line and connection cables at least 100 mm away from the main circuit, high-voltage
line, load line or power line.
- Ground the shield of the analog input/output cable in accordance with the manuals of each model.
However, do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems.
● Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable. Incorrect wiring (connecting the cable to an
incorrect interface) may cause failure of the module and external device.
● To terminal blocks or power connectors, connect circuits isolated from hazardous voltage by double/
reinforced insulation.

[STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]

WARNING
● Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on. Doing so may cause electric shock or
malfunctions.
● Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally. Failure to
do so in the power ON status may cause electric shock.
● Before modifying the program in operation, forcible output, running or stopping the PLC, read through
this manual carefully, and ensure complete safety. An operation error may damage the machinery or
cause accidents.
● Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same
time. (i. e. from an engineering tool and a GOT) Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the
PLC program.

4
[STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Do not disassemble or modify the PLC. Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
● Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable. Failure to do
so may cause device failures or malfunctions.
● Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices. Failure to do so
may cause device failures or malfunctions.
- Peripheral devices, expansion board, expansion adapter, and connector conversion adapter
- Extension modules, bus conversion module, and connector conversion module
- Battery

[OPERATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Construct an interlock circuit in the program so that the whole system always operates on the safe
side before executing the control (for data change) of the PLC in operation. Read the manual
thoroughly and ensure complete safety before executing other controls (for program change,
parameter change, forcible output and operation status change) of the PLC in operation. Otherwise,
the machine may be damaged and accidents may occur by erroneous operations.
● Note that the whole system may not be reset by the RUN/STOP/RESET switch when the CPU
module or intelligent function module detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-
diagnosis.
In that case, turn off and on the power.

[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● Please contact a certified electronic waste disposal company for the environmentally safe recycling
and disposal of your device.

[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
● The PLC is a precision instrument. During transportation, avoid impacts larger than those specified in
the general specifications of the User's Manual (Hardware) of the CPU module used by using
dedicated packaging boxes and shock-absorbing palettes. Failure to do so may cause failures in the
PLC. After transportation, verify operation of the PLC and check for damage of the mounting part, etc.

5
 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains text, diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation, safe use and
operation of the temperature control module of MELSEC iQ-F series and should be read and understood before attempting to
install or use the module.
Always forward it to the end user.

Regarding use of this product

• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been designed or
manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine or passenger
movement vehicles, consult Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product where major
accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system.

Note
• If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical engineer who is
qualified and trained in the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or use, please consult the nearest
Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference, please use it after
confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual
use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• This manual content, specification etc. may be changed, without a notice, for improvement.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you notice a doubtful
point, an error, etc., please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative. When doing so, please provide the
manual number given at the end of this manual.

6
MEMO

7
 CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

CHAPTER 1 DESCRIPTION 12

CHAPTER 2 SPECIFICATIONS 14
2.1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2 Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Input specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Measurement precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Current detector (CT) input specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Process values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Measured temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Output specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.4 Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CHAPTER 3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION 19

CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 21
4.1 Functions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2 Control Mode Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.3 Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.4 Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.5 Balance Bumpless Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6 RFB Limiter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.7 Simple Two-degree-of-freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.8 Normal/Reverse Operation Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.9 Proportional Band Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.10 Overlap/dead Band Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.11 Cooling Method Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.12 Auto Tuning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.13 AT (Auto Tuning) Bias Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.14 Startup Tuning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.15 Operations Mode Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.16 Cascade Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.17 SV Tracking Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.18 Settings Limiter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.19 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.20 Input Type Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.21 Sensor Correction Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.22 Primary Delay Digital Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.23 Temperature Rise Judgment Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.24 External (Other Analog Module) I/O Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

8
4.25 Output Limiter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.26 Output Change Ratio Limiter Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.27 Control Output Flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.28 Transistor Outputs Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.29 Alert Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.30 Loop Disconnection Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.31 Loop Disconnection Detection Dead Band Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.32 Heater Disconnection Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.33 Output OFF-time Current Error Detection Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

CONTENTS
4.34 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.35 Default Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.36 Error History Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.37 FX3 Allocation Mode Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 68

5.1 Overall Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

CHAPTER 6 WIRING 70
6.1 Spring Clamp Terminal Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.2 Terminals Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.3 Power Supply Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.4 External Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

CHAPTER 7 PARAMETER SETTING 77

7.1 Base Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.2 Application Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
7.3 CT Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.4 Refresh Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

CHAPTER 8 PROGRAMMING 81
8.1 Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Standard PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Heating-cooling PID control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

CHAPTER 9 TROUBLESHOOTING 90
9.1 Checks with LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
The POWER LED has turned OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
The RUN LED has turned OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
When the ERROR LED turns on or flashes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
9.2 Checks When Trouble Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
9.3 List of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.4 List of Alarm Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

APPENDIX 95
Appendix 1 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Appendix 2 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Certification of UL, cUL standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Requirement for compliance with EMC directive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

9
 Compliance with UKCA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Appendix 3 Module Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
List of buffer memory addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Details of buffer memory addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Appendix 5 PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
PID operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Actions of the temperature control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Proportional action (P action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Integral action (I action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Derivative action (D action) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
PID action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

INDEX 172

REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

10
RELEVANT MANUALS
Manual name <manual number> Description
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware) Describes the details of hardware of the FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC CPU module,
<SH082452ENG> including performance specifications, wiring, installation, and maintenance.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Application) Describes basic knowledge required for program design, functions of the CPU
<JY997D55401> module, devices/labels, and parameters.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Programming Manual (Program Design) Describes specifications of ladders, ST, FBD/LD, and other programs and labels.
<JY997D55701>
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 Programming Manual (Instructions, Standard Describes specifications of instructions and functions that can be used in programs.
Functions/Function Blocks)
<JY997D55801>
MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User's Manual (Temperature Control) Describes the temperature control module.
<SH-081799ENG> (This manual)
GX Works3 Operating Manual System configuration, parameter settings, and online operations of GX Works3.
<SH-081215ENG>

TERMS
Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.
For details on the FX3 devices that can be connected with the FX5, refer to the User’s Manual (Hardware) of the CPU module
to be used.
Terms Description
Engineering tool The software package for the MELSEC series programmable controllers

GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.
Terms Description
Analog adapter A generic term for FX5-4AD-ADP, FX5-4DA-ADP, FX5-4AD-PT-ADP, and FX5-4AD-TC-ADP
Battery A different name for FX3U-32BL
Communication adapter A generic term for FX5-232ADP and FX5-485ADP
Expansion adapter A generic term for the adapters for FX5 CPU module
Extension module A generic term for FX5 extension modules, FX3 extension modules, and extension modules (extension cable
type and extension connector type)
FX3 A generic term for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC programmable controllers
FX5 A generic term for FX5S, FX5UJ, FX5U, and FX5UC programmable controllers
FX5 CPU module A generic term for FX5S CPU module, FX5UJ CPU module, FX5U CPU module, and FX5UC CPU module
FX5S CPU module A generic term for FX5S-30MR/ES, FX5S-40MR/ES, FX5S-60MR/ES, FX5S-80MR/ES*1, FX5S-30MT/ES,
FX5S-40MT/ES, FX5S-60MT/ES, FX5S-80MT/ES*1, FX5S-30MT/ESS, FX5S-40MT/ESS, FX5S-60MT/ESS,
and FX5S-80MT/ESS*1
FX5U CPU module A generic term for FX5U-32MR/ES, FX5U-32MT/ES, FX5U-32MT/ESS, FX5U-64MR/ES, FX5U-64MT/ES,
FX5U-64MT/ESS, FX5U-80MR/ES, FX5U-80MT/ES, FX5U-80MT/ESS, FX5U-32MR/DS, FX5U-32MT/DS,
FX5U-32MT/DSS, FX5U-64MR/DS, FX5U-64MT/DS, FX5U-64MT/DSS, FX5U-80MR/DS, FX5U-80MT/DS, and
FX5U-80MT/DSS
FX5UC CPU module A generic term for FX5UC-32MT/D, FX5UC-32MT/DSS, FX5UC-64MT/D, FX5UC-64MT/DSS, FX5UC-96MT/D,
FX5UC-96MT/DSS, FX5UC-32MT/DS-TS, FX5UC-32MT/DSS-TS, and FX5UC-32MR/DS-TS
FX5UJ CPU module A generic term for FX5UJ-24MR/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ES, FX5UJ-24MT/ESS, FX5UJ-40MR/ES, FX5UJ-40MT/
ES, FX5UJ-40MT/ESS, FX5UJ-60MR/ES, FX5UJ-60MT/ES, and FX5UJ-60MT/ESS
GX Works3 The product name of the software package, SWnDND-GXW3, for the MELSEC programmable controllers (The
'n' represents a version.)

*1 Area-specific model

11
 1 DESCRIPTION
FX5-4LC temperature control module equipped with 4 channel input (thermocouples, resistance thermometer and micro
voltage input), 4 points output (open collector transistor) and 4 points current sensor input can perform temperature control.
Further, PID control is also possible using voltage/current inputs and voltage/current outputs by connecting a separate analog
expansion adapter and intelligent function module.
Temperature sensor
(Model K Thermocouple)
Process value (PV)
Heater current process value
Temperature tank

FX5 CPU module FX5-4LC

Current sensor Heater
(CTL-6-P-H)

Manipulated value (MV)

Solid State Relay

1 DESCRIPTION
12
MEMO
1

1 DESCRIPTION
13
 2 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the temperature control module specifications.

2.1 General Specifications

The general specifications other than below are the same as those for the CPU module to be connected.
For general specifications, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware)
Items Specifications
Dielectric withstand voltage 500 V AC for 1 minute Between all terminals and ground terminal
Insulation resistance 10 M or higher by 500 V DC
insulation resistance tester

2.2 Power Supply Specifications

The following table lists the power supply specifications.
Items Specifications
External power supply Power supply voltage 24 V DC +20%, -15%
Allowable instantaneous Operation continues when the instantaneous power failure is shorter than 5 ms.
power failure time
Current consumption 25 mA
Internal power supply Power supply voltage 5 V DC
Current consumption 140 mA

2.3 Performance Specifications

The following table lists the performance specifications.
Items Specifications
Control method Two-position control, PID control, Heating/cooling PID control, Cascade control
Control operation period 250 ms/4ch
Measured temperature range Page 17 Measured temperature range
Heater disconnection detection Alert is detected (Variable within range from 0.0 to 100.0 A by GX Works3.)
Operation mode 0: Not used
1: Monitor only
2: Monitor + alert
3: Monitor + alert + control
(Selected by GX Works3)
Insulation method • The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area and transistor output area from the
PLC.
• The DC/DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input area and
transistor output area.
• Channels are insulated from each other.
Number of occupied I/O points 8 points
Applicable CPU module • FX5UJ CPU module (From the first)
• FX5U CPU module (Ver.1.050 or later)
• FX5UC CPU module*1 (Ver.1.050 or later )
Applicable engineering tool • FX5UJ CPU module: GX Works3 (Ver.1.060N or later)
• FX5U/FX5UC CPU module: GX Works3 (Ver.1.035M or later)

*1 FX5-CNV-IFC or FX5-C1PS-5V is necessary to connect FX5-4LC to the FX5UC CPU module.

2 SPECIFICATIONS
14 2.1 General Specifications
Input specifications
Items Specifications
Number of input points 4 points
Input type*1 Thermocouple K, J, R, S, E, T, B, N JIS C 1602-1995
PL II, W5Re/W26Re, U, L
2
Resistance thermometer 3-wire type Pt100 JIS C 1604-1997 (New JIS)
3-wire type JPt100 JIS C 1604-1981 (obsolete JIS)
2-wire type/3-wire type Pt1000 JIS C 1604-2013
Micro voltage input
Measurement precision Page 15 Measurement precision
Cold contact temperature When ambient Within 1.0
compensation error temperature is 0 to 55 However, within 2.0 while input value is -150 to -100 / within 3.0 while input value is -200
to -150
When ambient Within 1.8
temperature is -20 to 0 However, within 3.6 while input value is -150 to -100 / within 5.4 while input value is -200
to -150
Resolution 0.1 (0.1), 1.0 (1.0), 0.5 V, or 5.0 V
Varies depending on input range of used sensors.
Sampling period 250 ms/4ch
Effect of external resistance Approx. 0.125 V/
(When thermocouple is used)
Effect of input lead wire 3-wire type Approx. 0.03%/ of full scale. 10  or less per 1-wire
resistance (When resistance
2-wire type Approx. 0.04%/ of full scale. 7.5  or less per 1-wire
thermometer is used)
Input impedance 1 M or more
Sensor current Approx. 0.20 mA (When resistance thermometer is used)
Operation when input is Upscale/downscale (When resistance thermometer is used)
disconnected/Operation
when input is short-circuited

*1 A different input can be selected for each channel.

Measurement precision
Measurement precision is as described below. However, cold contact temperature compensation errors are not included in
the thermocouple precision. For cold contact temperature compensation errors, refer to Page 15 Input specifications
Further, the input value rounds up the minimum resolution for the measurement precision described below.

If the ambient temperature is 255

Input type Input range Measurement precision
K, J, E, T, PL II, U, L Less than -100 3.0 1 digit
-100 to less than +500 1.5 1 digit
500 or more  (0.3% of display value) 1 digit
R, S, N, W5Re/W26Re Less than 1000 3.0 1 digit
1000 or more  (0.3% of display value) 1 digit
B Less than 400 70 1 digit
400 to less than 1000 3 1 digit
1000 or more  (0.3% of display value) 1 digit
Pt100, JPt100, Pt1000 Less than 200 0.6 1 digit
200 or more  (0.3% of display value) 1 digit
Micro voltage input  (0.3% of span) 1 digit

2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.3 Performance Specifications 15
 If the ambient temperature is 0 to 55
Input type Input range Measurement precision
K, J, E, T, PL II, U, L Less than -100 7.0 1 digit
-100 to less than +500 3.5 1 digit
500 or more  (0.7% of display value) 1 digit
R, S, N, W5Re/W26Re Less than 1000 7.0 1 digit
1000 or more  (0.7% of display value) 1 digit
B Less than 400 140 1 digit
400 to less than 1000 7 1 digit
1000 or more  (0.7% of display value) 1 digit
Pt100, JPt100, Pt1000 Less than 200 1.4 1 digit
200 or more  (0.7% of display value) 1 digit
Micro voltage input  (0.7% of span) 1 digit

If the ambient temperature is -20 to 0

Input type Input range Measurement precision
K, J, E, T, PL II, U, L Less than -100 9.0 1 digit
-100 to less than +500 4.5 1 digit
500 or more  (0.9% of display value) 1 digit
R, S, N, W5Re/W26Re Less than 1000 9.0 1 digit
1000 or more  (0.9% of display value) 1 digit
B Less than 400 180 1 digit
400 to less than 1000 9 1 digit
1000 or more  (0.9% of display value) 1 digit
Pt100, JPt100, Pt1000 Less than 200 1.8 ±1 digit
200 or more  (0.9% of display value) 1 digit
Micro voltage input  (0.9% of span) 1 digit

Current detector (CT) input specifications

Items Specifications
Number of input points 4 points
Current sensor When using this product in the United States or Canada, use current sensors with UL/cUL Listed and/or CSA certified such as
XOBA and XOBA7.
When using current sensors in countries other than the above, we recommend the following.
CTL-12-S36-8, CTL-12-S36-10, CTL-12-S56-10, CTL-12L-8, CTL-6-P, CTL-6-P-H, CTL-6-S-H (manufactured by U.R.D. Co.,
Ltd.)
Allowable input current 0 to 182.2 mArms
Heater current process value When CTL-12-S36-8 is used 0.0 to 100.0 A
When CTL-12-S36-10 is used 0.0 to 100.0 A
When CTL-12-S56-10 is used 0.0 to 100.0 A
When CTL-12-8 is used 0.0 to 100.0 A
When CTL-6-P is used 0.0 to 30.0 A
When CTL-6-P-H is used 0.0 to 30.0 A
When CTL-6-S-H is used 0.0 to 30.0 A
Measurement precision Larger one between 5% of input value and 2 A (Excluding precision of current sensor)
Sampling period 0.5 sec.

2 SPECIFICATIONS
16 2.3 Performance Specifications
Process values
To stabilize the measurement precision, warm-up (supply power) the system for 30 minutes or more after power-on.

Measured temperature range

Items Specifications
2
K -200 to +1300 (-100 to +2400)
J -200 to +1200 (-100 to +2100)
T -200 to +400 (-300 to +700)
S 0 to 1700 (0 to 3200)
R 0 to 1700 (0 to 3200)
E -200 to +1000 (0 to 1800)
B 0 to 1800 (0 to 3000)
N 0 to 1300 (0 to 2300)
PL  0 to 1200 (0 to 2300)
W5Re/W26Re 0 to 2300 (0 to 3000)
U -200 to +600 (-300 to +700)
L 0 to 900 (0 to 1600)
Micro voltage input DC0 to 10 mV, DC0 to 100 mV
Pt100 (3-wire type) -200 to +600 (-300 to +1100)
JPt100 (3-wire type) -200 to +500 (-300 to +900)
Pt1000 (2-wire type/3-wire -200.0 to +650.0 (-328 to +1184)
type)

Output specifications
Items Specifications
Number of output points 4 points
Output method NPN open collector transistor output
Rated load voltage 5 to 24 V DC
Maximum load voltage 30 V DC or less
Maximum load current 100 mA
Leak current in OFF status 0.1 mA or less
ON voltage 1.5 V (When maximum load current)
Control output cycle 0.5 to 100.0 sec.

2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.3 Performance Specifications 17
 2.4 Part Names
This section describes the names of each part of the temperature control module.
[6]
2-φ4.5 mounting holes

[3]
[2] [4]

[7]
[5]

[1]

[8]

[9]
[10]

No. Name Description

[1] Terminal block (Spring clamp terminal Used in temperature sensor and current sensor (CT) inputs, and transistor outputs.
block)
[2] Expansion cable Cable for connecting the module when adding the temperature control module.
[3] Direct mounting hole Screw holes (2-4.5, mounting screw: M4 screw) for direct installation.
[4] Operations status display LEDs Indicates the operating status of the module. (Page 18 LED display)
[5] Extension connector Connector for connecting the extension cable of an extension module.
[6] Name plate The product model name and manufacturer's serial number are shown.
[7] DIN rail mounting groove The module can be installed on DIN46277 rail (35 mm wide).
[8] DIN rail mounting hook Hook for mounting the module on a DIN rail of DIN46277 (35 mm wide).
[9] Pullout tab They are used when drawing out an extension cable.
[10] Power connector Connector for connecting the power cable. (Page 73 Power Supply Wiring)

LED display
The following table lists the LED display.
LED display LED Description
color
POWER Green Indicates the power supply status.
ON: Power ON
OFF: Power OFF or module failure
RUN Green Indicates the operations status.
ON: Normal operation
OFF: Error
ERROR Red Indicates the error status.
ON: Minor error or major error
Flashing: Moderate error or major error
OFF: Normal operation
OUT1 to OUT4 Green Indicates the output status.
ON: OUT1 to OUT4 output on
ON: OUT1 to OUT4 output off

2 SPECIFICATIONS
18 2.4 Part Names
3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION
This chapter describes the procedures before operation.

1. Checking the temperature control module specifications

Check the temperature control module specifications. (Page 14 SPECIFICATIONS)

2. Mounting the temperature control module

Mount the temperature control module to the FX5 CPU module. For details, refer to the following.
MELSEC iQ-F FX5S/FX5UJ/FX5U/FX5UC User's Manual (Hardware)
3
3. Wiring
Wire the external devices to the temperature control module.

4. Adding modules
Add temperature controllers to the module configuration using GX Works3.

When adding a temperature control module, FX3 allocation mode is usable if a module with the suffix
"(FX3)"after its name is selected.
• FX5-4LC: Normal mode
• FX5-4LC (FX3): FX3 allocation mode
If the mode is changed, an error occurs at startup, and setting value backup is required.
For details on the buffer memory data backup function, refer to the following.
Page 63 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function

5. Parameter settings
Set the temperature control module parameters using GX Works3.

6. Implementing auto tuning

If implementing auto tuning, set PID using the auto tuning function.
7. Programming
Create the program.

8. Warm-up operations
Implement warm-up for approx. 30 mins. before starting operations.

3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION

19
 MEMO

3 PROCEDURES BEFORE OPERATION

20
4 FUNCTION
This chapter describes the function details of the temperature control module.
For details on the buffer memory, refer to the following.
Page 117 Details of buffer memory addresses

This chapter describes the buffer memory for CH1.

For details on the buffer memory addresses for CH2 or later, refer to the following.
Page 99 List of buffer memory addresses

4
4.1 Functions List
The following table lists the temperature control module functions.
Items Description Usability Reference
Standard PID Heating/cooling
control PID control
Control mode selection function Use this function to select the control mode from among   Page 23
those described below.
• Standard PID control
• Heating/cooling PID control
Control method Two-position control Control methods can be achieved by setting a   Page 25
P control proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative  
time (D).
PI control  
PD control  
PID control  
Manual control A manipulated value (MV) can be set manually by users   Page 29
without being automatically calculated by the PID control.
Balance bumpless function This function prevents sudden outputs change during   Page 30
AUTOMAN mode switching.
RFB limiter function When the deviation (E) continues for a long period of   Page 30
time, this function prevents the PID operation results
(manipulated value (MV)) calculated by integral actions
from exceeding the effective range of the manipulated
value (MV).
Simple two-degree-of-freedom In addition to the PID control, this function selects a   Page 31
suitable response speed for the set value (SV) change
from three levels to simply achieve the two-degree-of-
freedom PID control.
Normal operation/reverse operation Select whether or not to implement a PID operation with   Page 31
selection function a normal operation or a reverse operation.
Proportional band setting function This function can set the proportional bands (P) for   Page 32
heating and cooling individually.
Overlap/dead band function The temperature where the cooling control output starts   Page 33
can be shifted using this function and, consequently,
whether control stability is prioritized or energy saving is
prioritized can be selected.
Cooling method setting function During auto tuning, an auto tuning operational expression   Page 34
is automatically selected depending on a selected
cooling method and an operation starts.
Auto tuning function The temperature control module automatically sets the   Page 35
best PID constants.
AT bias function This function changes the AT point by applying bias to   Page 39
the set value (SV) during auto tuning.

4 FUNCTION
4.1 Functions List 21
 Items Description Usability Reference
Standard PID Heating/cooling
control PID control
Startup tuning function The temperature control module constantly monitors the   Page 40
control state, so when the control system is oscillatory
just after the control start, owing to the set value (SV)
change or fluctuation of characteristics of a controlled
object, this function allows PID constants to be
automatically changed.
Operation mode Select from not used, monitor only, monitor + alert, and   Page 42
monitor + alert + control for each channel.
Cascade control Monitors the target control temperature using the master,   Page 43
and corrects slave set values according to the deviation
between the set value (SV) and the actual value.
Controlled devices are adjusted by the slaves and, as a
result, control of the target control temperature reaches
the set value.
SV tracking function This function prevents sudden output changes in the   Page 45
slave channel when turning OFF cascade control.
Settings limiter function This function limits the settings range of the set value   Page 45
(SV).
Setting change rate limiter setting Select whether to set individually or en bloc the setting   Page 46
function variation rate limiters for temperature rise and fall.
Input type selection function Select either resistance temperature detector or low   Page 46
voltage as the input sensor type.
Sensor correction function When there is an error between the temperature process   Page 47
value (PV) and actual temperature due to measurement
conditions, this function corrects the error. Corrects the
ratio to the full scale of the set input range as the error
correction value.
Primary delay digital filter By setting the primary delay digital filter, a temperature   Page 48
process value (PV) with smoothed transient noise can be
output.
Temperature rise judgment function This function judges whether the process value (PV) is   Page 49
within the temperature rise judgment range during
temperature sensor sampling.
External (other analog module) I/O This function enables inputs and outputs using another   Page 49
function analog module on the system.
Output limiter function This function limits the upper and lower limits of the   Page 50
manipulated value (MV).
Output change ratio limiter function The Output change ratio limiter functions to limit the   Page 51
amount of change in the manipulated value (MV) per unit
time. Outputs to control targets that dislike output
mutations can be limited using the set output change
amount.
Control output flag Turns ON and OFF the control outputs monitor.   Page 51
Transistor outputs selection This function selects the transistor output functions built   Page 52
into the temperature control module.
Alert function This function sends an alert when a temperature process   Page 53
value (PV) or deviation (E) meets the condition set in
advance.
Loop disconnection detection function This function measures the current flowing to the main   Page 60
heater circuit, and detects disconnections.
Loop disconnection detection dead This function sets the on-alert area centering on the set   Page 61
band function value (SV).
Heater disconnection detection This function measures the current flowing to the main   Page 62
function heater circuit, and detects disconnections.
Output OFF-time current error This function detects errors when the transistor outputs   Page 62
detection function are OFF.
Buffer memory data backup function This function backs up the set values in the buffer   Page 63
memory to non-volatile memory.
Default function This function sets the buffer memory to the default   Page 64
values.

4 FUNCTION
22 4.1 Functions List
 Items Description Usability Reference
Standard PID Heating/cooling
control PID control
Error history function This function stores a maximum of 16 errors and alarms   Page 64
that occurred in the temperature control module to buffer
memory as a history.
FX3 allocation mode function The temperature control module buffer memory   Page 67
addresses can be arranged in the same way as for
FX3U-4LC.

4.2 Control Mode Selection Function

This function selects the I/Os (external or internal) to be used as the control type (standard PID control for heating and cooling
PID control) for each control group. 4
The control groups are divided as described below.
• Control group 1: CH1 and CH2
• Control group 2: CH3 and CH4

Standard PID control, heating and cooling PID control

There are two types of control modes in the temperature control module: Standard PID control and heating-cooling PID
control.

■Standard PID control

This control method attempts to acquire stable control results by setting the constants for P (proportional band) I (integral
time) and D (derivative time).
"Response to noise" worsens for this PID control if the PID constants are set to improve "Response to settings". Further,
"Response to settings" worsens if the PID constants are set to improve "Response to noise".
The temperature control module can be used to select "Fast", "Normal", and "Slow" using the control response parameters for
the shape of the "Response to settings" with the PID constants to improve "Response to noise" unchanged.

■Heating/cooling PID control

Heating and cooling PID controls are the control methods that operate the outputs for both the heating and cooling control
systems.
In heating, the manipulated value (MV) operation decreases (reverse operation) according to increases in the process value
(PV), and in cooling, the manipulated value (MV) operation increased (normal operation) according to increases in the
process value (PV).
Set cooling and heating PID constants individually for proportional band (P) cooling and heating. Integral time (I) and
derivative time (D) are common set values for both heating and cooling.
Consequently, the temperature control module implements calculations using the four PID constants of heating proportional
band, cooling proportional band, integral time, and derivative time.
Further, it is possible to establish dead bands, and implement overlap and outputs, using the heating and cooling control
switching points.

4 FUNCTION
4.2 Control Mode Selection Function 23
 Selectable control modes
A control mode can be selected from the modes described below. Select a control mode in "Control mode selection" of "Base
Setting".
Control mode Control types Input Output
0 Standard PID control Internal Internal
1 Standard PID control External Internal
2 Standard PID control Internal External
3 Standard PID control External External
4 Heating/cooling PID control Internal Internal
5 Heating/cooling PID control External Internal
6 Heating/cooling PID control Internal External
7 Heating/cooling PID control External External

If Internal is selected in either inputs or outputs, control is implemented using the I/O built into the temperature control module.
If External is selected in either inputs or outputs, control is implemented using another analog module connected to the CPU
module.

■If external inputs are selected

If external inputs are selected, the parameters are as described below.
• Input range setting
The internal span is from "external input range upper limit" to "external input range lower limit".
The input range is from "external input range lower limit" to "external input range upper limit".
• Settings limiter
The settings range for the upper limit setting limiter is from "lower limit setting limiter value +1" to "External input range upper
limit".
The settings range for the lower limit setting limiter is from "external input range lower limit" to "upper limit setting limiter -1".
• Set value settings
The set value settings are from "lower limit setting limiter" to "upper limit setting limiter".
• Input errors
If a value at or greater than "external input range upper limit +5%/Input span" is set in the external input value, an (upper limit)
input error occurs, and an event (Un\G429, b0) turns ON.
If a value at or less than "external input range lower limit -5%/Input span" is set in the external input value, a (lower limit) input
error occurs, and an event (Un\G429, b1) turns ON.

■If external outputs are selected

If external outputs are selected, the values that scale the control output value (from the external output range lower limit to the
external output range upper limit) are written to the manipulated value (MV) for external (other analog module) outputs,
Manipulated value for heating (MVh) for external (other analog module) outputs, and Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) for
external (other analog module) outputs, regardless of the control mode switching settings.

4 FUNCTION
24 4.2 Control Mode Selection Function
4.3 Control Method
The following control methods can be achieved by setting a proportional band (P), integral time (I), and derivative time (D).
• Two-position control
• P control
• PI control
• PD control
• PID control

Two-position control
Two-position control is a control method that uses the 0% manipulated value (MV) and 100% manipulated value (MV).
Turning ON and OFF the manipulated value (MV) repeatedly makes the temperature process value come close to the set
4
value (SV), and the temperature is kept constant.

By the setting in "Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting" of "Application Setting", the chattering of
transistor outputs under two-position control can be prevented. Set the set value (SV).

■Standard PID control

The module operates as described below outside the setting range of "Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting" in
"Application Setting".
Condition Transistor output status
The temperature process value (PV) is below the lower limit of the adjustment ON
sensitivity (dead band)
The temperature process value (PV) is above the upper limit of the adjustment OFF
sensitivity (dead band)

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV) Adjustment sensitivity

(dead band)

Time
ON

Manipulated value (MV) OFF

4 FUNCTION
4.3 Control Method 25
 ■Heating-cooling PID control
The module operates as described below outside the setting range of "Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting" in
"Application Setting".
Condition Heating transistor output status Cooling transistor output status
The temperature process value (PV) is below the lower limit of the ON OFF
adjustment sensitivity (dead band)
The temperature process value (PV) is above the upper limit of the OFF ON
adjustment sensitivity (dead band)

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV) Adjustment sensitivity

(dead band)

Time
ON
Heating output
OFF
ON
Cooling output OFF

■Setting method
Set 0 (0 ()) in the following buffer memory areas.
• 'CH1 Proportional band (P) setting' (Un\G431) (Page 135 CH1 Proportional band (P) setting)
• 'CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting' (Un\G431) (Page 136 CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting)

4 FUNCTION
26 4.3 Control Method
P control
P control is a control method in which the manipulated value (MV) is determined proportional to the deviation (E) between the
temperature process value (PV) and set value (SV).

■Standard PID control

The manipulated value (MV) is 50% in the following conditions.
• Temperature process value (PV) = Set value (SV)

Manipulated value (MV)*1

100%

50% 4

0% Temperature
Set value (SV)*2 process value (PV)

Proportional band (P)

*1 A value to be actually output is within the output limiter range set in "Upper limit output limiter" and "Lower limit output limiter" of "Limiter
setting" in "Application Setting".
*2 The set value (SV) is the center of the proportional band (P).

■Heating-cooling PID control

The manipulated value for heating (MVh) and the manipulated value for cooling (MVc) are both 0% in the following conditions.
• If the overlap/dead band set value is 0 using temperature process value (PV)= set value (SV)

Manipulated value Manipulated value

100% for heating (MVh)*1 for cooling (MVc)*1

0% Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)

Heating proportional band (Ph) Cooling proportional band (Pc)

*1 A value to be actually output is within the output limiter range set in "Upper limit output limiter" and "Lower limit output limiter" of "Limiter
setting" in "Application Setting". (Page 78 Application Setting)

■Setting method
Make the settings as described below.
• 'CH1 Integral time (I) setting' (Un\G432): 0 to 0 (s) (Page 136 CH1 Integral time (I) setting)
• 'CH1 Derivative time (D) setting' (Un\G433): 0 to 0 (s) (Page 137 CH1 Derivative time (D) setting)

PI control
PI control is a control method in which derivative elements are added to P control, and thereby corrects an offset (remaining
deviation) that remains when the temperature is stable. By setting the integral time (I) properly, the temperature process value
(PV) matches the set value (SV).

■Setting method
Make the settings as described below.
• 'CH1 Derivative time (D) setting' (Un\G433): 0 to 0 (s) (Page 137 CH1 Derivative time (D) setting)

4 FUNCTION
4.3 Control Method 27
 PD control
PD control is a control method in which the derivative time (D) is set in addition to P control. The control mechanism is the
same as P control.

■Setting method
Make the settings as described below.
• 'CH1 Integral time (I) setting' (Un\G432): 0 to 0 (s) (Page 136 CH1 Integral time (I) setting)

PID control
PID control is a control method in which derivative elements are added to PI control, and thereby the temperature shifts to a
stable status in a short period of time even when a drastic change has occurred. By setting the derivative time (D) properly,
the controlled object shifts to a stable status in a short period of time.

■Settings method (If using standard PID control)

Make the settings as described below.
• 'CH1 Proportional band (P) setting' (Un\G431): Any value ( Page 135 CH1 Proportional band (P) setting)
• 'CH1 Integral time (I) setting' (Un\G432): Any value ( Page 136 CH1 Integral time (I) setting)
• 'CH1 Derivative time (D) setting' (Un\G433): Any value ( Page 137 CH1 Derivative time (D) setting)

■Settings method (If using heating-cooling PID control)

Make the settings as described below.
• 'CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting' (Un\G431): Any value ( Page 136 CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph)
setting)
• 'CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting' (Un\G439): Any value ( Page 140 CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc)
setting)
• 'CH1 Integral time (I) setting' (Un\G432): Any value (Page 136 CH1 Integral time (I) setting)
• 'CH1 Derivative time (D) setting' (Un\G433): Any value (Page 137 CH1 Derivative time (D) setting)

Parameters related to control methods

The following table shows the parameters related to each control method.
Parameter Setting range
Two-position P control PD control PI control PID control
control
Input range setting • Thermocouple: 0 to 35
• Platinum resistance thermometer: 36 to 45
• Micro voltage input: 46 to 47
Set value (SV) setting Set a value within the temperature measuring range of the set input range.
Adjustment sensitivity 1 to 100 (0.1 to 10.0%) The set value is ignored.
(dead band) setting
Upper limit output The set value is -50 to 1050 (-5.0 to 105.0%)
limiter, lower limit ignored.
output limiter (standard
PID control only)
Upper limit output The set value is 0 to 1050 (0.0 to 105.0%)
limiter, cooling upper ignored.
limit output limiter
(heating-cooling PID
control only)
Output change ratio The set value is 1 to 1000 (1 to 100.0%/s)
limiter ignored.
Control output cycle The set value is • Settings range: 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0 s)
setting ignored. • Default value: 300 (30.0 s)
Cooling control output The set value is • Settings range: 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0 s)
cycle setting (heating- ignored. • Default value: 300 (30.0 s)
cooling PID control
only)
Overlap/dead band -100 to 100 (-10.0 to 10.0%)
setting

4 FUNCTION
28 4.3 Control Method
Buffer memory areas related to control methods
The following table shows the buffer memory areas related to each control method.
Buffer memory Buffer memory Setting range
name address Two-position P control PD control P control PID control
control
CH1 Cooling 431 Fix the setting to 0. 0 to 10000 (0.0 to 1000.0% span)
proportional band (P)
setting, CH1 Heating
proportional band (Ph)
setting (If using normal
mode)
CH1 Cooling 439
proportional band (Pc)
setting (If using normal
4
mode)
CH1 Integral time (I) 432 The set value is Fix the setting to 0. 1 to 3600(s)
setting (If using normal ignored.
mode)
CH1 Differential time 433 The set value is Fix the setting to 0. 1 to 3600(s) The set value is 1 to 3600(s)
(D) setting (If using ignored. ignored.
normal mode)

The temperature control module automatically sets optimum PID constants when the following functions are
used.
• Auto Tuning Function (Page 35 Auto Tuning Function)
• Startup tuning function (Page 40 Startup Tuning Function)

4.4 Manual Control

A manipulated value (MV) can be set manually by users without being automatically calculated using the PID control.

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
1. Set 'CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift' (Un\G518) to Manual (MAN) (1). (Page 149 CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift)

2. Set the manipulated value (MV) in 'CH1 Manual output setting' (Un\G519). (Page 150 CH1 Manual output setting)

Setting range
The settings range is as described below.
• -50 to 1050 (-5.0 to 105.0%)

4 FUNCTION
4.4 Manual Control 29
 4.5 Balance Bumpless Function
Prevents overshoot due to sudden changes in the manipulated value (MV) when switching from AUTO mode to MAN mode
(or from MAN mode to AUTO mode).
The balance bumpless from MAN mode to AUTO mode function is enabled only during PID control or PI control mode.
This function automatically operates during switching. No particular settings are required.
Manipulated value
(MV)
AUTO mode MAN mode AUTO mode

Time
(1) (2) (3)

(1) Switches from AUTO mode to MAN mode.

The manipulated value (MV) when switching to MAN mode obeys the manipulated value (MV) during AUTO mode.
(2) Changes the manipulated value (MV) in MAN mode.
(3) Switches from MAN mode to AUTO mode.
The manipulated value (MV) when switching to AUTO mode is the manipulated value (MV) calculated automatically for the set value (SV).

4.6 RFB Limiter Function

The RFB (reset feedback) function operates when deviation (E) continues for a long period of time.
When the deviation (E) continues for a long period of time, this function prevents the PID operation results (manipulated value
(MV)) calculated by integral actions from exceeding the effective range of the manipulated value (MV).
This function automatically operates when the PID control is implemented. No particular settings are required.

When a PID operation result is larger than the upper limit output limiter value, the temperature control module
operates as described below.
• The RFB function levels the manipulated value (MV) to the upper limit output limiter value by feeding back
an excess value to the integral value.
When a PID operation result is smaller than the lower limit output limiter value, the temperature control
module operates as described below.
• The RFB function levels the manipulated value (MV) to the lower limit output limiter value by feeding back a
required value to the integral value.

4 FUNCTION
30 4.5 Balance Bumpless Function
4.7 Simple Two-degree-of-freedom
In addition to the PID control, this function selects a suitable response speed for the set value (SV) change from three levels
to simply achieve the two-degree-of-freedom PID control.
General PID controls are called one-degree-of freedom PID control. In the one-degree-of freedom PID control, when PID
constants to improve "response to the change of the set value (SV)" have been set, "response to the noise" degrades.
Conversely, when PID constants to improve "response to the noise" have been set, "response to the change of the set value
(SV)" degrades.
Compared to one-degree-of freedom PID control, "response to the change of the set value (SV)" and "response to the noise"
can be compatible with each other in the two-degree-of-freedom PID control.
Note that required parameter settings increase and it is difficult for PID constants to be automatically set by the auto tuning
function for complete two-degree-of-freedom PID control. Consequently, the temperature control module operates in the
4
simple two-degree-of-freedom PID control for which parameters are simplified.
In the PID control (simple two-degree-of-freedom) of the temperature control module, users can use PID constants making
good "response to the noise" and the form of "response to change of the set value (SV)" can be selected from the following
three types.
• Fast
• Normal
• Slow

Temperature process value (PV) Fast

Normal

Set value (SV) 2

Change
Slow

Set value (SV) 1

Time
Set value (SV) change point

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Control basic
parameters]  [Control Response Parameters]

4.8 Normal/Reverse Operation Selection Function

This function selects whether to implement normal or reverse operations during standard PID control.
This function can be used in all the control methods (two-position control, P control, PI control, PD control, and PID control).
(Page 25 Control Method)
For details on the operation, refer to the following.
Page 167 Actions of the temperature control module

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting] [Normal
Operation/Reverse Operation Setting]

4 FUNCTION
4.7 Simple Two-degree-of-freedom 31
 4.9 Proportional Band Setting Function
This function can set the proportional bands (P) for heating and cooling individually. Different gradients can be set by using
different proportional band (P) values in heating and cooling areas.

Manipulated value Heating proportional band (Ph) Cooling proportional band (Pc)
for heating (MVh)
Manipulated value
100%
for heating (MVh) It is also possible to
100% narrow only the
Heating cooling proportional
operation band (Pc).

Manipulated value
0% for heating (MVh)0%
Cooling operation
Set value (SV) amount (MVc)0%

Cooling operation

Manipulated value
for cooling (MVc)
100%
-100%

Manipulated value for cooling (MVc)

Setting method
■For heating
Set in the following buffer memory area.
• 'CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting' (Un\G431) (Page 136 CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting)

■For cooling
Set in the following buffer memory area.
• 'CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting' (Un\G439) (Page 140 CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting)

4 FUNCTION
32 4.9 Proportional Band Setting Function
4.10 Overlap/dead Band Function
In the heating-cooling control, the temperature process value (PV) significantly changes due to a slight heating or cooling
control output when the heat produced by a controlled object and natural cooling are being balanced. Consequently, an
excessive output may be implemented.
The temperature where the cooling control output starts can be shifted using this function; consequently, whether control
stability is prioritized or energy saving is prioritized can be selected.

Overlap
The overlap refers to the temperature area where both of heating control and cooling control are implemented. In the
temperature area where both heating and cooling output overlap, both of the outputs negate each other, and so the control
gain becomes moderate. Consequently, the variation amount in the temperature process value (PV) for the output becomes
4
small, improving control stability.
If establishing an overlap area, set a negative value in the "Overlap/dead band setting".

Manipulated value Cooling proportional band

(MV) (Pc)
Heating
proportional band
(Ph)
100%

Heating output value Cooling output value

0% Process value (PV)

Set value (SV)

Overlap

Dead band
The dead band refers to the temperature area where neither heating control output nor cooling control output is implemented.
When the temperature process value (PV) is stable within this area, output is not implemented for a slight change in the
temperature, resulting in energy saving.
If establishing a dead band area, set a positive value in the "Overlap/dead band setting".
Manipulated value
(MV) Heating Cooling
proportional proportional
band band
(Ph) (Pc)

100%

Heating output value Cooling output value

0% Process value (PV)

Set value (SV)
Dead
Band

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Heating/cooling
control setting]  [Overlap/dead band setting]

4 FUNCTION
4.10 Overlap/dead Band Function 33
 4.11 Cooling Method Setting Function
This function switches the cooling method depending on whether the cooling device is air-cooling type, water-cooling type, or
cooling gain linear type in the case of heating and cooling PID control. As the cooling characteristics between air cooling and
water cooling are very different, it is possible to request PID constants for the device by setting the cooling method when
implementing AT (auto tuning).
• Air-cooling type/water-cooling type
Uses an algorithm that presumes heating and cooling PID controls for plastic molding devices.
Good responsiveness and small set value response characteristics for over-travel amounts can be obtained even for devices
that have cooling configurations with non-linear characteristics.
• Cooling gain linear type
Uses an algorithm that presumes applications without non-linear cooling performance, such as electronic coolers that use
Peltier elements.

During auto tuning implementation, PID constants are calculated and the auto tuning is implemented based
on this setting. Consequently, more suitable PID constants can be calculated by the setting according to the
cooling characteristics of the device. For details on the auto tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 35 Auto Tuning Function

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Heating/cooling
control setting]  [Cooling method setting]

• An operational expression of the auto tuning for the calculation of PID constants is determined based on this
setting. Consequently, always configure this setting before implementing auto tuning.
• Air cooling and water cooling roughly indicate the level of the cooling ability. When a device is too cooled
even though air cooling has been selected, set "1: Water cooling". When a device is less likely to be cooled
even though water cooling has been selected, set "0: Air cooling".
• Generally, the ability of water cooling is higher than that of air cooling and cooling may be too strong when
the same PID constants as the one for air cooling are used for water cooling. Consequently, it may take
some time for control to stabilize. Consequently, the auto tuning calculates PID constants so that the PID
constants of when "1: Water cooling" is set become larger than the ones of when "0: Air cooling" is set.

4 FUNCTION
34 4.11 Cooling Method Setting Function
4.12 Auto Tuning Function
The temperature control module automatically sets the best PID constants. In the auto tuning, the control output is turned ON
and OFF, and PID constants are calculated depending on the hunting cycle and amplitude that occur when overshoots and
undershoots of the temperature process value (PV) to the set value (SV) are repeated.

Operations during auto tuning

The following operations are implemented if auto tuning during temperature rise.
Process value (PV)

4
Set value (SV)

AT start AT finish

Time

Settings related to the auto tuning

The auto tuning can be executed when the following setting have been configured. Configure the other settings to the values
used for actual operations because actual control starts on completion of the auto tuning.
When "0" has been set for 'CH1 Proportional band (P) setting' (Un\G431) or 'CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting'
(Un\G431), auto tuning is not implemented.
• "Input range setting" of "Control basic parameters" in "Application Setting"
• "Set Value (SV) Setting" of "Control basic parameters" in "Application Setting"
• "Upper limit output limiter" of "Limiter setting" in "Application Setting"
• "Lower limit output limiter" of "Limiter setting" in "Application Setting"
• "Cooling upper limit output limiter" of "Heating/cooling control setting" in "Application Setting"
• "Output change ratio limiter" of "Limiter setting" in "Application Setting"
• "Sensor Correction Value Setting" in "Application Setting"
• "Control output cycle setting" of "Control basic parameters" in "Application Setting"
• "Cooling control output cycle setting" of "Heating/cooling control setting" in "Application Setting"
• "Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting" in "Application Setting"
• 'CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift' (Un\G518)
• "AT Bias" of "Auto tuning setting" in "Application Setting"
• "Normal Operation/Reverse Operation Setting" in "Application Setting"

Storing the calculation values after auto tuning

After the completion of the auto tuning, calculation values are stored in the following buffer memory areas.
• 'CH1 Proportional band (P) setting' (Un\G431)
• 'CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting' (Un\G431)
• 'CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting' (Un\G439)
• 'CH1 Integral time (I) setting' (Un\G432)
• 'CH1 Differential time (D) setting' (Un\G433)
• 'CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time' (Un\G537)*1
*1 A value that is twice as large as the value in 'CH1 Integral time (I) setting' (Un\G432) is automatically set. However, when this setting has
been set to 0s at the auto tuning, the loop disconnection detection judgment time is not stored.

4 FUNCTION
4.12 Auto Tuning Function 35
 Precautions
• During setting change rate limiter operations, auto tuning starts after the set value (SV) reaches the AT point.
• Implement auto tuning if control has started with both the AT implementation command and ST implementation command
in the 1 status.
• If the AT implementation command is set to 1 during start-up tuning, start-up tuning stops, and auto tuning is implemented.
• If a value other than 0 is set in the Output change ratio limiter and auto tuning is implemented, the optimum PID constant
may not be obtainable. If implementing auto tuning, do not use the output change ratio limiter.
• During auto tuning implementation, the loop disconnection alert function is disabled.

Auto tuning implementation procedure

■Using the engineering tool
[Tool]  [Module Tool List]
1. Select "Temperature trace" in
"Temperature Control Module" and
click the [OK] button.

2. Select the module to configure the

temperature control setting and click
the [OK] button.

3. Select "Monitor data write" from the

items described below.
[Setting]  [Monitor data write]

4. Select the parameter to be changed

from "Add to" to click the  button.

4 FUNCTION
36 4.12 Auto Tuning Function
 5. The parameter is added in "View".

6. Click the [OK] button.

7. Write the set value to be changed.

8. Set "Setting/Operation mode

command" to "1: Operation mode
command".

9. Set "Auto tuning command" to "1:

ON".
10. Set "Auto tuning command" to "1:
ON", "Auto tuning status" becomes
"Implementing" and the auto tuning
starts.
11. When the auto tuning is completed,
"Auto tuning status" becomes
"Stopped".
12. The temperature control is
implemented with the set PID
constants.
■Using programs
Auto tuning is implemented using the following procedure.

1. Setting each data in the temperature control module

Set each data. (Page 35 Settings related to the auto tuning)
2. Operation mode setting
• Turn OFFON 'Setting/operation mode command' (Un\G399, b1). (Page 126 Setting/operation mode command (b1))
• Check that 'Setting/operation mode status' (Un\G398, b1) is ON. (Page 124 Setting/operation mode status (b1))
3. Starting auto tuning
Turn OFFON 'CH1 Auto tuning command' (Un\G399, b4). (Page 127 Auto tuning command (b4 to 7))

4. Implementing auto tuning

'CH1 Auto tuning status' (Un\G398, b4) is ON. (Page 125 Auto tuning status (b4 to 7))

5. After the completion of the auto tuning (setting PID constants)

'CH1 Auto tuning status' (Un\G398, b4) turns OFF and calculation values are set in the buffer memory. (Page 35 Storing
the calculation values after auto tuning)
6. Temperature control using the set PID constants
The temperature control is implemented with the set PID constants.

4 FUNCTION
4.12 Auto Tuning Function 37
 Auto tuning implementation conditions and stop conditions
■Auto tuning implementation conditions
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, auto tuning can be implemented.
• AUTO/MAN mode switching is "0: AUTO mode"
• Operations mode setting is "3: Monitor + alert + control"
• Proportional band setting is other than 0
• The values of upper limit output limiter, heating upper limit output limiter, and cooling upper limit output limiter are all 1
(0.1%) min.
• The lower limit output limiter value is 999 (99.9%) max.
• No input value errors (upper limit/lower limit) have occurred
• Cascade ON/OFF is "0: Cascade OFF"
• AT/ST error completion flag is 0

■Auto tuning stop conditions

If any of the following conditions occur during auto tuning, auto tuning force-ends, and the AT/ST error completion flag turns
ON.
• An input value error (upper limit/lower limit) occurs
• Control start/stop switching is changed to "0: Stop control"
• The set value (SV) is changed
• AUTO/MAN mode switching is changed to "1: MAN mode"
• Operations mode setting is changed to "3: Monitor + alert + control"
• 2-position operation is implemented (when proportional band is set to 0)
• The values in the upper limit outputs limiter, heating upper limit outputs limiter, cooling upper limit outputs limiter, and the
lower limit outputs limiter are changed
• The sensor correction value is changed
• The primary delay digital filter value is changed
• The AT bias value is changed
• Normal Operation/Reverse Operation setting is changed
• Cooling method setting is changed
• The target value, AT bias, or settings limiter is changed, and the AT point (= Set value (SV) + AT bias) is outside the settings
limiter range
• Cascade ON/OFF is changed to "1: Cascade ON"
• Auto tuning does not finish even if approx. 2 hours has elapsed since auto tuning started
• A hardware error (24 V DC power supply error, cooling contact temperature compensation error, or A/D converter error) is
detected
• The calculated value of the auto tuning PID constant exceeds the settings range

4 FUNCTION
38 4.12 Auto Tuning Function
4.13 AT (Auto Tuning) Bias Function
If the process value (PV) does not exceed the set value (SV) during auto tuning implementation, AT bias is set.
Auto tuning implements 2-position control on the set value (SV), and calculates and sets the PID constants by hunting the
process value (PV). Depending on the control target, however, auto tuning using hunting may be poor. In such cases, the auto
tuning set value (SV)= AT point can be changed using the AT bias settings.

Ex.
When a negative value has been set for AT bias (Reverse Operation)
Temperature process value (PV)

4
Set value (SV)
(1)
AT point

Time

(1) 'CH1 AT bias' (Un\G546)

Precautions
• If the set value (SV) + AT bias (=AT point) is outside the settings limiter range, auto tuning is implemented using the settings
limiter value.
• If the setting change rate limiter setting is other than 0 when auto tuning starts, the set value (SV) changes according to the
settings variation rate limiter setting until the AT point is reached. At this time, the event AT implementation status
(Un\G429, b14) turns ON after the set value reaches the AT point, and auto tuning starts.

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Auto tuning
setting][AT bias]

4 FUNCTION
4.13 AT (Auto Tuning) Bias Function 39
 4.14 Startup Tuning Function
Startup tuning is the function that automatically measures, calculates, and sets the optimal PID constants from the response
characteristics of the control target either during control start or when the set value (SV) changes. If control starts as easy auto
tuning, the PID constants can be requested in a short time from the control target with slow response without disturbing
controllability. Further, if the control targets that require PID constants differ for each temperature setting, PID constants can
be requested for each set value (SV) change.
Startup tuning starts automatically when either control starts or the set value (SV) changes if all of the startup tuning
implementation conditions are satisfied.
If startup tuning finishes normally, control continues using the newly-calculated PID constants.

Operations during startup tuning

Assuming that all startup tuning implementation functions are satisfied. (Page 41 Startup tuning implementation
conditions)
Process value (PV)

Set value (SV) 2

Set value (SV) 1

Time

Set the PID constants Set the PID constants

(1) (2)
(1) When control starts, startup tuning starts, and the optimal PID constants are calculated from the response characteristics of the target control, and the
values stored in the buffer memories.
(2) When the set values are changed, startup tuning starts, and the optimal PID constants are calculated from the response characteristics of the target
control, and the values stored in the buffer memories.

4 FUNCTION
40 4.14 Startup Tuning Function
Startup tuning implementation conditions and stop conditions
■Startup tuning implementation conditions
If all of the following conditions are satisfied, startup tuning can be implemented.
• AUTO/MAN mode switching is "0: AUTO mode"
• Operations mode setting is "3: Monitor + alert + control"
• Proportional band setting is other than 0
• The values of upper limit output limiter, heating upper limit output limiter, and cooling upper limit output limiter are all 1
(0.1%) min.
• The lower limit output limiter value is 999 (99.9%) max.
• No input value errors (upper limit/lower limit) have occurred
• Cascade ON/OFF is "0: Cascade OFF"
4
• If using startup tuning when changing set values (SV), the process value (PV) is stable
• Outputs change when startup tuning starts, and are saturated by the upper limit outputs limiter or the lower limit outputs
limited
• In startup tuning when control starts, the difference between the process value (PV) and set value (SV) is x2 or greater than
the proportional band
• AT implementation command is 0
• AT/ST error completion flag is 0

■Startup tuning stop conditions

If any of the following conditions occur during startup tuning, startup tuning force-ends, and the AT/ST error completion flag
turns ON.
• An input value error (upper limit/lower limit) occurs
• Control start/stop switching is changed to "0: Stop control"
• AUTO/MAN mode switching is changed to "1: MAN mode"
• Operations mode setting is changed to "3: Monitor + alert + control"
• 2-position operation is implemented (when proportional band is set to 0)
• The values in the upper limit outputs limiter, heating upper limit outputs limiter, cooling upper limit outputs limiter, and the
lower limit outputs limiter are changed
• The sensor correction value is changed
• The primary delay digital filter value is changed
• Cascade ON/OFF is changed to "1: Cascade ON"
• Startup tuning does not finish even if approx. 100 mins. has elapsed since startup tuning started
• A hardware error (24 V DC power supply error, cooling contact temperature compensation error, or A/D converter error) is
detected
• AT implementation command is set to 1
• Manipulated value saturation time is too short
• The calculated value of the startup tuning PID constant exceeds the settings range

Precautions
• To implement startup tuning when control starts, make sure to turn ON the heater power supply at the same time or before
starting startup tuning.
• Start startup tuning when the difference between the process value (PV) and set value (SV) is x2 or greater than the
proportional band when startup tuning starts.
• If limiting the manipulated value using the output limiter, the optimal PID constants may not be obtainable even if startup
tuning was implemented.
• If the output change ratio limiter is set, the optimal PID constants may not be obtainable even if startup tuning was
implemented.
• During data measurements for calculations, an error completion may occur if the set value (SV) is changed so that the
manipulated output is excluded from the saturation status.

4 FUNCTION
4.14 Startup Tuning Function 41
 4.15 Operations Mode Selection Function
This function selects the operations mode for each channel.
Operation mode Operation
0: Not used This mode does not implement monitoring, alert operations, or controls.
1: Monitor only This mode only monitors the process values.
If external inputs are selected, values written to the temperature measurement values for external (other analog
module) inputs are processed as the process values.
2: Monitor + alert This mode monitors the process values and implements alert operations.
Alert operations are implemented only when control start/stop switching is set to "Start control".
3: Monitor + alert + control This mode implements monitoring, alert operations, and controls.
Alert operations and controls are implemented only when control start/stop switching is set to "Start control".

The operations statuses using a combination of control start/control stop are as described below.
Control start/ Description Operation mode
control stop Not used Monitor only Monitor + alert Monitor + alert +
control
0: Control stop Measurement value (PV) Displays 0 Displays the process value
Manipulated value (MV) Displays 0 Displays -50
Alert operation Disable
Temperature rise completion Disable
judgment
Output Outputs OFF
(Transistor outputs selection 0 to
2)*1
Output Outputs OFF
(Transistor outputs selection 3 to
6)*1
Output Outputs OFF
(Transistor outputs selection 7) *1
1: Control start Measurement value (PV) Displays 0 Displays the process value
Manipulated value (MV) Displays 0 Displays -50 Displays the
manipulated value
Alert operation Disable Enable
Temperature rise completion Disable Enable
judgment
Output Outputs OFF Control outputs
(Transistor outputs selection 0 to
2)*1
Output Outputs OFF Alert status
(Transistor outputs selection 3 to
6)*1
Output Outputs OFF Loop disconnection
(Transistor outputs selection 7) *1 alert status

*1 For the transistor outputs selection function, refer toPage 52 Transistor Outputs Selection Function.

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Base Setting]  [Operations mode
setting]

4 FUNCTION
42 4.15 Operations Mode Selection Function
4.16 Cascade Control
Cascade control is a method of control as a single control loop by combining two controls: the master channel and slave
channel. Ideal for when there is a large time delay between the temperature near the heat source and the temperature of the
control target.
• The master channel calculated PID as either control target process value (PV) inputs or external input value inputs, and
converts the control inputs into cascade signals using the cascade bias and cascade gain to correct the slave channel set
values (SV).
• The slave channel implements PID control using the set values (SV) converted into cascade signals.
The channel combinations that can be used by the master channel and slave channel are determined for each control loop.
For the channel combinations, refer to the following.
Control loop Master channel Slave channel
4
Control group 1 (GR1) Channel 1 Channel 2
Control group 2 (GR2) Channel 3 Channel 4

Ex.
Control loop 1 block diagram
Control loop 1

Master channel (channel 1)

Cascade OFF
Process value - Manipulated value (MV)
(PV) or external PID calculation
input value Control output OUT1

+ Cascade ON

Set value (SV) Set value monitor

Slave channel (channel 2)

Process value - Manipulated value (MV)

(PV) or external PID calculation
input value Control output OUT2
+

Set value monitor

Set value (SV) Cascade bias Cascade gain

+ +

Cascade monitor

The conditions that enable cascade control are as described below.

• Master and slave channels are separate, and a suitable intermediate control amount can be selected
• Response speed of the control target is sufficiently faster for the slave channel than for the master channel

4 FUNCTION
4.16 Cascade Control 43
 Precautions
• Depending on the control conditions, it may be necessary to limit the movement area of the slave controller using "cascade
gain" and "cascade bias".
• During cascade control, auto tuning and startup tuning cannot be implemented.

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Cascade
function]

Tuning during cascade control

During cascade control, tuning (auto tuning and startup tuning) cannot be used. Turn OFF cascade control before
implementing tuning, and set benchmark PID constants.
Implement tuning for each channel separately, and stop control for the channels that are not to be tuned. (Set the operations
mode settings to "0: Not used", "1: Monitor only", or "2: Monitor + alert".)

■Tuning procedure example

1. Set only the slave channel to control status and implement auto tuning to request the slave channel PID constants.

Implementing PID control on both the master and slave channels during cascade control may cause integral
operations to raise the low frequency gain too high, causing slow cycle vibration response in one or other of
the channels.
Consequently, generally set the slave channel so that this phenomenon does not occur using either P control
(I=0, D=0) or PD control (I=0).
Either the P control constant or PD control constant determines the auto tuning results implemented by the
slave channel as standard, and sets the proportional band to approx. 1.4.

2. Set only the master channel to control status and implement auto tuning to request the master channel PID constants.

3. Set the same master channel and slave channel set values (SV).

4. Turn OFF cascade status, and implement control for the slave channel only. Set the master channel operations mode to
either "1: Monitor" or "2: Monitor + alert", and wire control outputs for the slave channel only.
5. When the master and slave channel process values (PV) are stable, request the difference En in the process values (PV)
between the master channel and the slave channel. (Master channel process value (PV) - slave channel process value
(PV))

6. Set the slave channel set value range to approx. 4 the process value difference En determined in Step 5, and set the
cascade gain. (Slave channel set value range  slave channel inputs range span)
7. Set the cascade bias. (Slave channel set value range  2)

8. Set the slave channel set value. (Master channel set value (SV) - Process value difference En)

9. Set the master channel operations mode setting to "3: Monitor + alert + control", and turn ON cascade control. Check the
control status while manually adjusting the master channel PID constants.

4 FUNCTION
44 4.16 Cascade Control
4.17 SV Tracking Function
The SV tracking function tracks the slave channel set value in the set values immediately before switching (set value monitor
value) when turning OFF cascade. This prevents sudden changes to the slave channel outputs when turning OFF cascade.
• Control group 1 (GR1): Common setting for CH1 and CH2.
• Control group 2 (GR2): Common setting for CH3 and CH4.

Operation example
If SV tracking is used If SV tracking is not used

(1) (1) 4
(2) (2)

t t
(3) (3)

(1) Slave channel set value (SV) setting

(2) Slave channel set value monitor
(3) Cascade control ONOFF switching point

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Cascade
setting][SV tracking selection]

4.18 Settings Limiter Function

The settings limiter function limits the settings range of the set value (SV).
Lower limit value Set value (SV) setting range Upper limit value
of the input range of the input range

Lower limit setting limiter Upper limit setting limiter

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Limiter setting]

Set the settings limiter settings range using the inputs range upper limit  upper limit limiter  lower limit limiter
 input range lower limit.

4 FUNCTION
4.17 SV Tracking Function 45
 4.19 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function
The setting change rate limiter settings is the function that changes the set value (SV) difference in steps when the set value
(SV) is changed. Set so as to avoid sudden set value (SV) changes. Set values (SV) undergoing changes can be checked
using ‘Set value (SV) monitor’ (Un\G406).

Ex.
If the set value is raised from set value (SV) 1 to set value (SV) 2

Set value (SV) 2

(After change) SV
Span
0.1 to 100.0%
SV 1 min.

Set value (SV) 1

(Before change) Set the percentage span rise
of the set value per minute.

Change set value

Setting method
Set the span change amount (%) per 1 minute. The span types are as described below.
Input type Span
During internal temperature inputs Input range span
During internal micro voltage inputs Scaling span
During external inputs External inputs span

■Change amount setting

Set only "Setting change rate limiter".
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Limiter setting]

Precautions
The value including below the decimal point is handled. Set the actual value using the value multiplied by 10.

4.20 Input Type Selection Function

The thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer type, temperature measurement range, and micro voltage input can be
switched for each channel. Implementable in settings mode only.
The value displayed in the process value when micro voltage input is selected is from the micro voltage input scaling lower
limit to the micro voltage input scaling upper limit Set so that span (upper limit - lower limit absolute values) is 20000 max., and
"micro voltage input scaling upper limit" is greater than "micro voltage input scaling lower limit".

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Control basic
parameters]  [Input range setting]

4 FUNCTION
46 4.19 Setting Change Rate Limiter Setting Function
4.21 Sensor Correction Function
When there is an error between the temperature process value (PV) and actual temperature due to measurement conditions,
this function corrects the error.

Sensor correction operations

The process value (PV) and flag (input error) statuses are as shown in the following table depending on the relationship
between the process value before correction and the value after correction.

A B C D E F G

Measuring range
lower limit
Lower limit value of
the input range
Upper limit value of
the input range
Measuring range
upper limit 4
Lower limit error Upper limit error
judgment point judgment point
Input range

Process value Value after Temperature Flag (input error) status Remarks
before correction process value (PV)
correction
Area A  Display lower limit value Input error (lower limit) status is If the process value before correction is in area A,
ON correction processing is not implemented
Area B Areas A and B Display lower limit value Input error (lower limit) status is Values after correction are not input to areas E, F,
ON or G
Areas C and D Value after correction
Area C Areas A and B Display lower limit value OFF Values after correction are not input to areas E, F,
or G
Areas C and D Value after correction
Area D Areas A and B Display lower limit value OFF 
Areas C, D, and E Value after correction
Areas F and G Display upper limit value
Area E Areas D and E Value after correction OFF Values after correction are not input to areas A, B,
Areas F and G Display upper limit value or C

Area F Areas D and E Value after correction Input error (upper limit) status Values after correction are not input to areas A, B,
is ON or C
Areas F and G Display upper limit value
Area G  Display upper limit value Input error (upper limit) status If the process value before correction is in area G,
is ON correction processing is not implemented

Setting method
Set the span correction as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Sensor
correction value setting]
The span types are as described below.
Input type Span
During internal temperature inputs Input range span
During internal micro voltage inputs Scaling span
During external inputs External inputs span

Precautions
The value including below the decimal point is handled. Set the actual value using the value multiplied by 100.

4 FUNCTION
4.21 Sensor Correction Function 47
 4.22 Primary Delay Digital Filter
By setting the primary delay digital filter, a temperature process value (PV) with smoothed transient noise can be output.

Temperature
If the primary delay process value (PV)
digital filter is not set

Time

Temperature
If the primary delay process value (PV)
digital filter is set

Time

Set the time for the temperature process value (PV) to change by 63.3% in the primary delay digital filter.

Temperature
If the primary delay process value (PV)
digital filter is not set

Time

Temperature
process value (PV)
If the primary delay
digital filter is set

63.3%
Time

(1)
(1) "Primary Delay Digital Filter Setting" in "Application Setting"

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Primary Delay
Digital Filter Setting]

4 FUNCTION
48 4.22 Primary Delay Digital Filter
4.23 Temperature Rise Judgment Function
This function judges whether the temperature process value (PV) is within the temperature rise completion range.

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.

■Temperature rise completion range setting

Specify the width of the temperature rise completion range for the set value (SV).
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Temperature rise
completion setting]  [Temperature rise completion range setting]

■Temperature rise completion soak time

4
Set the time taken to turn ON 'CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag' (Un\G404) after temperature rise completion.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Temperature rise
completion setting]  [Temperature rise completion soak time setting]
Process value (PV)

Temperature rise completion

range set value
Set value (SV)
Temperature rise completion
range set value

Temperature rise
completion soak time

Temperature rise ON Temperature

Temperature rise incomplete
completion flag rise complete
OFF

4.24 External (Other Analog Module) I/O Function

This function enables inputs and outputs using another analog module on the system.

Input
The temperature control module generally uses the temperature processed by the thermocouple or platinum resistance
thermometer connected to the module as the temperature process value (PV). The temperature control module can use the
digital input value of the current or voltage converted in another analog module on the system as a temperature process value
(PV).

■Setting method
Store the value of another analog module in 'CH1 Temperature process value (PV) for input with another (external) analog
module' (Un\G438).

Select the control mode to use the external inputs using control mode switching.
• If a greater value than (external input range upper limit + 5% of external input range) is set, an input upper
limit alert occurs, and an event (Un\G429, b0) turns ON.
• If a smaller value than (external input range lower limit + -5% of external input range) is set, an input lower
limit alert occurs, and an event (Un\G429, b1) turns ON.

4 FUNCTION
4.23 Temperature Rise Judgment Function 49
 Output
Instead of the transistor output from inside the temperature control module, an analog output value from another analog
module can be used as the manipulated value (MV).

■Setting method
Store the value in 'CH1 Manipulated value (MV) for output with another analog module' (Un\G407) in the buffer memory of
another analog module.

The values that scale the manipulated value (MV) (from the external output range lower limit (Un\G596) to the
external output range upper limit (Un\G595)) are written to the 'CH1 Manipulated value (MV) for output with
another (external) analog module'/'CH1 Manipulated value for heating (MVh) for output with another (external)
analog module' (Un\G407) and 'CH1 Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) for output with another (external)
analog module' (Un\G409), regardless of the control mode switching settings.

4.25 Output Limiter Function

This function sets the upper and lower limit values if outputting the manipulated value (MV) calculated using PID operations to
an external device.
Manipulated value (MV)

100%
This range has no control outputs
Upper limit output limiter

Lower limit output limiter

This range has no control outputs
0%

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Limiter setting]

Precautions
The output limiter function is disabled during 2-position control implementation.

4 FUNCTION
50 4.25 Output Limiter Function
4.26 Output Change Ratio Limiter Function
The output change ratio limiter functions to limit the amount of change in the manipulated value (MV) per unit time (1s).
Control outputs can be limited using the output change rate that has been set.
Outputs are based on set tendencies without the manipulated value (MV) changing suddenly during operations mode travel
(when outside the proportional band) or when the set value (SV) changes (when the change is large).
If the output change rate limiter is not set

Upper limit output limiter

Manipulated value (MV) 0.1 to 100.0%
4
Sudden change 1s
to manipulated
value
Set the percentage amount of
Manipulated value (MV) change to the manipulated
Lower limit output limiter value per second.

Go to operation /Change set value (SV)/Sudden

output change due to noise, etc.

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Limiter setting]

Precautions
• Reducing the output change ratio limiter value (reducing the tendency) slows the control response. Further, differential
effects are eliminated.
• The output change ratio limiter is disabled during 2-position control implementation.
• If a value other than 0 is set in the output change ratio limiter and auto tuning is implemented, a suitable PID constant may
not be obtainable.

4.27 Control Output Flag

This function monitors the ON and OFF status of the control outputs.
If internal outputs are selected in the control outputs, transistor outputs for the temperature control module will be
implemented.
If external outputs is selected in the control outputs, the output status uses the time proportional calculation results.
Checkable using the "CH1 Transistor output flag" (Un\G405).

4 FUNCTION
4.26 Output Change Ratio Limiter Function 51
 4.28 Transistor Outputs Selection Function
The transistor outputs selection function is the function that selects the internal transistor outputs function. Settings are made
for each channel separately.
The transistor output functions depend on the control mode settings as described below.
Transistor output Control mode
functions 0, 1: Standard PID control 2, 3: Standard PID control 4, 5: Heating/cooling PID 6, 7: Heating/cooling PID
selection set (Internal outputs) (External outputs) control control
values (Internal outputs)*1 (External outputs)
0 OUT1 CH1 operations output Normally OFF CH1 heating operations output Normally OFF
OUT2 CH2 operations output Normally OFF CH1 cooling operations output Normally OFF
OUT3 CH3 operations output Normally OFF CH3 heating operations output Normally OFF
OUT4 CH4 operations output Normally OFF CH3 cooling operations output Normally OFF
1 OUT1 CH1 operations output CH1 operations output CH1 heating operations output CH1 heating operations output
OUT2 CH2 operations output CH2 operations output CH1 cooling operations output CH2 heating operations output
OUT3 CH3 operations output CH3 operations output CH3 heating operations output CH3 heating operations output
OUT4 CH4 operations output CH4 operations output CH3 cooling operations output CH4 heating operations output
2 OUT1 CH1 operations output CH1 operations output CH1 heating operations output CH1 cooling operations output
OUT2 CH2 operations output CH2 operations output CH1 cooling operations output CH2 cooling operations output
OUT3 CH3 operations output CH3 operations output CH3 heating operations output CH3 cooling operations output
OUT4 CH4 operations output CH4 operations output CH3 cooling operations output CH4 cooling operations output
3 OUT1 CH1 operations output CH1 alert 1 status CH1 heating operations output CH1 alert 1 status
OUT2 CH2 operations output CH2 alert 1 status CH1 cooling operations output CH2 alert 1 status
OUT3 CH3 operations output CH3 alert 1 status CH3 heating operations output CH3 alert 1 status
OUT4 CH4 operations output CH4 alert 1 status CH3 cooling operations output CH4 alert 1 status
4 OUT1 CH1 operations output CH1 alert 2 status CH1 heating operations output CH1 alert 2 status
OUT2 CH2 operations output CH2 alert 2 status CH1 cooling operations output CH2 alert 2 status
OUT3 CH3 operations output CH3 alert 2 status CH3 heating operations output CH3 alert 2 status
OUT4 CH4 operations output CH4 alert 2 status CH3 cooling operations output CH4 alert 2 status
5 OUT1 CH1 operations output CH1 alert 3 status CH1 heating operations output CH1 alert 3 status
OUT2 CH2 operations output CH2 alert 3 status CH1 cooling operations output CH2 alert 3 status
OUT3 CH3 operations output CH3 alert 3 status CH3 heating operations output CH3 alert 3 status
OUT4 CH4 operations output CH4 alert 3 status CH3 cooling operations output CH4 alert 3 status
6 OUT1 CH1 operations output CH1 alert 4 status CH1 heating operations output CH1 alert 4 status
OUT2 CH2 operations output CH2 alert 4 status CH1 cooling operations output CH2 alert 4 status
OUT3 CH3 operations output CH3 alert 4 status CH3 heating operations output CH3 alert 4 status
OUT4 CH4 operations output CH4 alert 4 status CH3 cooling operations output CH4 alert 4 status
7 OUT1 CH1 operations output CH1 loop disconnection alert CH1 heating operations output Normally OFF
status
OUT2 CH2 operations output CH2 loop disconnection alert CH1 cooling operations output Normally OFF
status
OUT3 CH3 operations output CH3 loop disconnection alert CH3 heating operations output Normally OFF
status
OUT4 CH4 operations output CH4 loop disconnection alert CH3 cooling operations output Normally OFF
status

*1 If control modes 4 or 5 are selected, use CH2 and CH4 control outputs or external outputs.

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Transistor
outputs function]

4 FUNCTION
52 4.28 Transistor Outputs Selection Function
4.29 Alert Function
This function sends an alert when a temperature process value (PV) or deviation (E) meets the condition set in advance. Use
this function to activate danger signals of devices or safety devices. The alert functions are classified into input alerts and
deviation alerts, and are as described below depending on the alert mode set value.
Setting Alert mode Setting range of alert set value
value
0 Not Warning (Alert not implemented) 
1 Upper limit input value alert Value within set input value range*1
2 Lower limit input value alert
3 Upper Limit Deviation Alert - span to + span*2
4 Lower Limit Deviation Alert 4
5 Upper/lower Limit Deviation Alert 0 to + span*2
6 Within-Range Alert
7 Upper limit input alert with wait Value within set input range*1
8 Lower limit input alert with wait
9 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with wait - span to + span*2
10 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with wait
11 Upper/lower Limit Deviation Alert with wait 0 to + span*2
12 Upper Limit Deviation Alert with Re-wait - span to + span*2
13 Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-wait
14 Upper/Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Re-wait 0 to + span*2

*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling range. During external inputs, external input
range.
*2 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

Input alert
When the temperature process value (PV) is equal to or greater than the alert set value, the system issues the upper limit
input alert.
When the temperature process value (PV) is equal to or smaller than the alert set value, the system issues the lower limit
input alert.
Upper limit input alert Lower limit input alert

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

Alert set value Alert set value

Time Time
Alert status Alert status
Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

■Setting method
Set an alert mode. (Page 58 Alert mode)
• Upper limit input alert: Set "Upper Limit Input Alert" as the alert mode.
• Lower limit input alert: Set "Lower Limit Input Alert" as the alert mode.

4 FUNCTION
4.29 Alert Function 53
 Deviation alert
When the deviation (E) between the temperature process value (PV) and the set value (SV) meets a particular condition, the
system issues the deviation alert.
The set value (SV) that is referenced is the "set value (SV) monitor".

■Setting the set value (SV) and the setting change rate limiter
If the Setting change rate limiter has been set: The "CH1 set value (SV) monitor" (Un\G406) obeys the set value (SV) after the
change as described below.
Temperature process value (PV)
(1)

Set value (SV) 2 (2)

Change (3)

Set value (SV) 1

0 Time

60 Second
(1) "Set value (SV) Setting" of "Control basic parameters" in "Application Setting"
(2) 'CH1 Set value (SV) monitor' (Un\G406)
(3) "Setting change rate limiter" of "Limiter setting" in "Application Setting"

■Upper limit deviation alert

When the deviation (E) is equal to or greater than the alert set value, the system issues a deviation alert.
When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negative

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)*1

Set value (SV)*1

Time Time

Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1) Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1)

Alert set value

0 Time
0 Time
Alert set value

Alert status Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode setting, this value becomes the set value or the monitored value. The setting range of the alert set value is
(-(Full scale of the input range)) to the full scale of the input range. (Page 54 Setting the set value (SV) and the setting change rate
limiter)

4 FUNCTION
54 4.29 Alert Function
■Lower limit deviation alert
When the deviation (E) is equal to or smaller than the alert set value, the system issues a deviation alert.
When the alert set value is positive When the alert set value is negative

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)*1

Set value (SV)*1

Time Time

Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1) Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1) 4

Alert set value

0 Time
0 Time
Alert set value

Alert status Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the set alert mode, this value becomes the set value or the monitored value. The setting range of the alert set value is (-
(Full scale of the input range)) to the full scale of the input range. (Page 54 Setting the set value (SV) and the setting change rate
limiter)

■Upper/lower limit deviation alert

When one of the following conditions is satisfied, the system issues a deviation alert.
• Deviation (E)  Alert set value
• Deviation (E)  -(Alert set value)

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)*1

Time
Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1)

Alert set value

0 Time

-(Alert set value)

Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode setting, this value becomes the set value or the monitored value. The setting range of the alert set value is
(-(Full scale of the input range)) to the full scale of the input range. (Page 54 Setting the set value (SV) and the setting change rate
limiter)

4 FUNCTION
4.29 Alert Function 55
 ■Within-range alert
When the following condition is satisfied, the system issues an alert.
• -(Alert set value)  Deviation (E)  Alert set value

Temperature process value (PV)

Set value (SV)*1

Time
Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1)

Alert set value

0 Time

-(Alert set value)

Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode setting, this value becomes the set value or the monitored value. The setting range of the alert set value is
(-(Full scale of the input range)) to the full scale of the input range. (Page 54 Setting the set value (SV) and the setting change rate
limiter)

Alert with wait

Even though the temperature process value (PV) or deviation (E) has been in an alert status when the mode is shifted from
the setting mode to the operation mode ('Setting/operation mode command' (Un\G399, b1) is turned OFFON), this condition
is ignored and no alert occurs. The alert function can be disabled until the temperature process value (PV) or deviation (E)
condition in which an alert occurs ceases.

Ex.
When the alert mode has been set to "Lower Limit Deviation Alert with Wait"
Lower limit deviation alert Lower limit deviation alert with wait

Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1) Deviation (E) (=Temperature process value (PV) - Set value (SV)*1)

0 Time 0 Time

Alert set value Alert set value

Wait operation area

Alert status Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

*1 Depending on the alert mode setting, this value becomes the set value or the monitored value. (Page 54 Setting the set value (SV)
and the setting change rate limiter)

When the system enters non-alert status even once after an alert judgment has started following the set alert
mode, alert with wait is disabled even though the mode is shifted to alert with wait.

4 FUNCTION
56 4.29 Alert Function
■Setting method
Select one of the following alert modes. (Page 58 Alert mode)
Alert mode setting
Setting value Alert mode name
7 Upper limit input alert with wait
8 Lower limit input alert with wait
9 Upper limit deviation alert with wait
10 Lower limit deviation alert with wait
11 Upper/lower limit deviation alert with wait

Alert with re-wait

A function to disable the alert function once again when the set value (SV) is changed is added to an alert with wait. This is
4
called an alert with re-wait.
When a control that changes the set value (SV) is implemented, the alert that is supposed to occur can be avoided when the
set value (SV) is changed by selecting an alert with re-wait.

Ex.
When the temperature process value (PV) is at the position shown as below before the set value (SV) change

Temperature process value (PV)

Before set value (SV) change Alert area

Alert set value Set value (SV)

Set value (SV) change

Temperature process value (PV)

After set value (SV) change Alert area

Alert set value Set value (SV)*1

*1 Depending on the alert mode setting, this value becomes the set value or the monitored value. (Page 54 Setting the set value (SV)
and the setting change rate limiter)
When the set value (SV) of a deviation alert is changed, the temperature process value (PV) enters the alert area, so the
system enters alert status. To prevent the case described above, alert outputs can be suspended.

■Setting method
Select one of the following alert modes.
Alert mode setting
Setting value Alert mode name
12 Upper limit deviation alert with re-wait
13 Lower limit deviation alert with re-wait
14 Upper/lower limit deviation alert with re-wait

• If "Setting change rate limiter setting" is set in "Base Setting" and if using the slave during cascade control, alert with re-wait
is not enabled.
• When "Setting change rate limiter setting" in "Base Setting" has been set, the value in 'CH1 Set value (SV) monitor'
(Un\G406) follows the set value (SV) and gradually changes when the set value (SV) is changed. When it is supposed that
the re-wait function is enabled under such a situation, the re-wait function would be always active, and an alert would not be
output even while the temperature process value (PV) is not following the value in 'CH1 Set value (SV) monitor' (Un\G406).
To prevent such cases, the re-wait function is disabled when a setting change rate limiter is used.

4 FUNCTION
4.29 Alert Function 57
 Setting alert modes and alert set values
The following describes the settings of alert modes and alert set values.

■Alert mode
Set alert modes.
Set "Alert 1 mode setting" to "Alert 4 mode setting" using the procedure described below. Up to 4 items can be set.
Alert modes of Alerts 1 to 4 correspond to the alert set values 1 to 4.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Alert setting]

■Alert set value

Set the temperature at which CH1 Alert 1 (Un\G401, b8) to CH1 Alert 4 (Un\G401, b11) turn ON (1) according to the alert
mode that has been selected. Up to 4 items can be set.
Set "Alert set value 1" to "Alert set value 4" using the following procedure.
Alert set values 1 to 4 correspond to the alert modes of Alert 1 to 4.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Alert setting]

Setting an alert dead band

When the temperature process value (PV) or deviation (E) is close to the alert set value, the status may change repeatedly
between the alert status and non-alert status due to inconsistent inputs.
In this case, by setting an alert dead band, repetition of the status change caused by inconsistent inputs can be prevented.

■Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Alert setting] 
[Alert dead band setting]

Ex.
When the alert mode has been set to "Upper Limit Input Alert"
When a value other than 0 has been set for "Alert dead band setting" of "Alert setting" in "Application Setting", the system
issues an alert when the input upper limit becomes equal to or greater than the alert set value. When the value becomes
equal to or smaller than the alert dead band, the status changes to the non-alert status. (Lower right diagram)
When 0 has been set for "Alert dead band setting" of "Alert When a value other than 0 has been set for "Alert dead band
setting" in "Application Setting" setting" of "Alert setting" in "Application Setting"

Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)

Alert set value Alert set value

Dead band

Time Time
Alert status Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status Non-alert status Alert status

4 FUNCTION
58 4.29 Alert Function
Setting the number of alert delays
Set the number of times to implement sampling to judge an alert. By setting the number of times to implement sampling, when
the temperature process value (PV) stays within the alert range after the temperature process value (PV) has reached the
alert set value until the number of times to implement sampling exceeds the number of alert delays, an alert occurs.

■Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Alert setting] 
[Number of alert delay]

Ex.
When the alert mode has been set to "Upper Limit Input Alert"
When 5 (times) is set as the number of alert delays, the system does not create an alert when the number of times to
4
implement sampling is 4 times or less.

Temperature process value (PV)

Alert set value

Set value (SV)

Time
Number of samplings

3 times 5 times
Alert status

Non-alert status Alert status

Alert mode and related settings

The following table shows the alert modes and the related settings described in this section.
Enabled or used: , disabled or not used: 
Alert Alert dead band Number of alert Alert with wait Alert with re-wait
setting delay
Input alert Upper limit input alert    
Lower limit input alert    
Deviation alert Upper limit deviation alert    
Lower limit deviation alert    
Upper/lower limit deviation    
alert
Within-range alert    

4 FUNCTION
4.29 Alert Function 59
 4.30 Loop Disconnection Detection Function
This function detects errors that occur in a control system (control loop) such as a load (heater) disconnection, an externally-
operable device (such as a magnetic relay) error, and input disconnection.

How an error is detected

The variation amount of the temperature process value (PV) is monitored for each 'Loop disconnection detection judgment
time' (Un\G537) from the time that control outputs were 0% (or the lower limit output limiter value) or less, or 100% (or the
upper limit output limiter value) or greater to detect heater disconnections and input disconnections.
The loop disconnection detection area can be set using the loop disconnection detection dead band function.

Operation
The loop disconnection detection function operates as described below.
Operation Manipulated amount is 0% (or the lower limit output Manipulated amount is 100% (or the upper limit
limiter) or less output limiter) or greater
Reverse Operation An alert status occurs if the process value (PV) in the loop An alert status occurs if the process value (PV) in the loop
disconnection detection settings time does not fall to the loop disconnection detection settings time does not rise to the loop
disconnection detection judgment width or greater.*1 disconnection detection judgment width or greater.*1
Normal Operation An alert status occurs if the process value (PV) in the loop An alert status occurs if the process value (PV) in the loop
disconnection detection settings time does not rise to the loop disconnection detection settings time does not fall to the loop
disconnection detection judgment width or greater.*1 disconnection detection judgment width or greater.*1

*1 If internal thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer inputs selection= 2

If internal micro voltage inputs selection= 0.2% of scaling span
If external inputs selection= 0.2% of external inputs span

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Loop
disconnection detection setting]

• When this function is not necessary, set 0 for "Loop disconnection detection judgment time" of "Loop
disconnection detection setting" in "Application Setting".
• During auto tuning, the loop disconnection detection settings does not operate.
• During heating and cooling PID control, the loop disconnection detection settings does not operate.

4 FUNCTION
60 4.30 Loop Disconnection Detection Function
4.31 Loop Disconnection Detection Dead Band
Function
Set the non-alert area having the set value (SV) at the center (temperature width in which no loop disconnection is detected)
to prevent accidental alerts of the loop disconnection detection.
When the temperature process value (PV) is within the loop disconnection detection dead band, an alert is not output even
though the loop disconnection alert conditions have been satisfied.

Temperature process value (PV)

4
(1)

Set value (SV) Non-alert area

Time
(1) 'CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band' (Un\G538) (this band has the set value (SV) at the center)*1
*1 If internal thermocouple/platinum resistance thermometer inputs selection= 0.8
If internal micro voltage inputs selection= 0.8% of scaling span
If external inputs selection= 0.8% of external inputs span

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Loop
disconnection detection setting]  [Loop disconnection detection dead band]

When this function is not necessary, set 0 for "Loop disconnection detection dead band" of "Loop
disconnection detection setting" in "Application Setting".

4 FUNCTION
4.31 Loop Disconnection Detection Dead Band Function 61
 4.32 Heater Disconnection Detection Function
When a transistor output is ON, this function checks whether or not a heater has a disconnection using the Heater current
process value (load current value detected by a current sensor (CT)). This function compares the heater current process
value and the heater disconnection alert current value. When the Heater current process value becomes equal to or smaller
than the heater disconnection alert current value, the heater is regarded as having a disconnection. However, when the
transistor-output ON time is 220 ms or less, no heater disconnection is detected. (CH1 Heater disconnection detection
(Un\G401, b12) remains OFF.)
The timing when an alert is output is described below.
• 500 msn
n = Value set for "Heater disconnection/output OFF-time current error detection delay count" of "Loop disconnection detection
setting" in "Application Setting"
When the heater disconnection status lasts longer than the time described above, the following operations are implemented.
• 'CH1 alert ON flag' (Un\G398, b12) turns ON (1).
• 'CH1 Heater disconnection detection' (Un\G401, b12) turns ON (1).
• CH heater disconnection detection (alarm code: 088) is stored in 'Latest alarm code' (Un\G3).

Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.

1. Set the judgment value for heater disconnection detection in "Heater disconnection alert settings" in "Loop disconnection
detection settings" in "Application Setting".
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Heater
disconnection detection setting]
2. Set how many times heater disconnections are detected successively to regard the heater as disconnected for "Heater
disconnection/output OFF-time current error detection delay count" of "Heater disconnection detection setting" in
"Application Setting".

4.33 Output OFF-time Current Error Detection Function

Transistor output errors can be detected using this function. A current sensor (CT) for heater disconnection detection is used
to check for errors of when transistor outputs are OFF.
A Heater current process value and the heater disconnection alert current value are compared. If the Heater current process
value is larger than the heater disconnection alert current value, an output OFF-time current error occurs.
Detection of output OFF-time current errors is implemented every 500 ms. When the OFF time of a transistor output has been
set as 220 ms below, output OFF-time current errors are not detected. (CH1 Output OFF-time current error (Un\G401, b14)
remains OFF (0).)
The timing when an alert is output is described below.
• 500 msn
n = Value set for "Heater disconnection/output OFF-time current error detection delay count" of "Loop disconnection detection
setting" in "Application Setting"
When the output OFF-time current error status lasts longer than the time described above, the following operations are
implemented.
• 'CH1 alert ON flag' (Un\G398, b12) turns ON (1).
• 'CH1 Output OFF-time current error' (Un\G401, b14) turns ON (1).
• Current error detection when CH outputs are OFF (alarm code: 08A) is stored in 'Latest alarm code' (Un\G3).

4 FUNCTION
62 4.32 Heater Disconnection Detection Function
Setting method
Configure the settings as described below.

1. Set the judgment value for current error detection when outputs are OFF in "Heater disconnection alert settings" in"Loop
disconnection detection settings" in "Application Setting".
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]  [Heater
disconnection detection setting]

2. Set how many times current errors while outputs are OFF are detected successively to regard a current error while
outputs are OFF as having occurred in "Heater disconnection/output OFF-time current error detection delay count" of
"Heater disconnection detection setting" in "Application Setting".

4
4.34 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function
This function backs up data in buffer memory areas to the non-volatile memory.
The backed up data is transferred from the non-volatile memory to the buffer memory when the power is turned OFFON or
the CPU module is reset. Consequently, when the power supply is turned OFFON and the CPU module is reset,
temperatures can be adjusted even if no data has been written.

Target buffer memory

Refer to the list of buffer memory allocations. (Page 99 List of buffer memory addresses)
To write data to the non-volatile memory, turn OFF and ON 'Setting value backup command' (Un\G399, b8).
When writing the data to the non-volatile memory is completed, 'Setting value backup completion flag' (Un\G398, b8) turns
ON.
Temperature control module
1. "Set value backup command"
CPU module
(Un\G399, b8): ON (Write command)
Non-volatile memory
Buffer memory
data
2. Write

3. "Set value backup completion flag"

(Un\G398, b8): ON (complete)
Read
When power is
turned OFF ON
During STOP RUN
During reset

If writing the data to the non-volatile memory is not completed successfully, 'Setting value backup failure flag' (Un\G398, b10)
turns ON.

■Setting change
Change the settings of the buffer memory areas while 'Setting value backup completion flag' (Un\G398, b8) is OFF.

■Reading data from the non-volatile memory

Reading is enabled when the power supply is turned OFFON and the CPU module is reset.

■Precautions following implementation of the set value backup function

When the power supply is turned OFFON and the CPU module is reset after this function is implemented, the data
transferred to buffer memory is overwritten by the GX Works3 parameter settings.
To use the set values stored as the backup data of the initial settings of the module, implement one of the following actions.
• Do not set GX Works3 parameters
• When configuring the parameter setting of GX Works3, correct the set values of the parameters to the ones stored as
backup data, and write the parameters to the CPU module

4 FUNCTION
4.34 Buffer Memory Data Backup Function 63
 4.35 Default Function
The data type initializes the "settings" buffer memory.
For the types of buffer memory, refer to the following.
Page 99 List of buffer memory addresses

Setting method
Set in the following buffer memory area.
• Default setting registration command (Un\G399, b9) (Page 127 Default setting registration command (b9))

Precautions
• In normal mode, control mode selection and auto settings during input range changes, output signal are not initialized.
• Not initialized during control or implementation of the buffer memory data backup function.

4.36 Error History Function

The errors or alarms that occurred in the temperature control module are stored in the buffer memory as history. A maximum
16 of both errors and alarms can be stored.

Operation
When errors occur, error codes and error times of the errors are stored in 'Error history No.1' (Un\G3600 to Un\G3609) in
order.
When alarms occur, alarm codes and alarm times of the alarms are stored in 'Alarm history No.1' (Un\G3760 to Un\G3769) in
order.
• Error code allocation details
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Un\G3600 Error code
Un\G3601 First 2 digits of date Last 2 digits of date
Un\G3602 Month Day
Un\G3603 Time Minute
Un\G3604 Second Day of the week
Un\G3605 Millisecond (upper) Millisecond (lower)
Un\G3606
…

System area

Un\G3609

• Alarm code allocation details

b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Un\G3760 Alarm code
Un\G3761 First 2 digits of date Last 2 digits of date
Un\G3762 Month Day
Un\G3763 Time Minute
Un\G3764 Second Day of the week
Un\G3765 Millisecond (upper) Millisecond (lower)
Un\G3766
…

System area

Un\G3769

4 FUNCTION
64 4.35 Default Function
Ex.
Storage example of error history and alarm history data
Item Stored contents Storage example*1
First two digits of the year/last two digits Stored in BCD code. 2015H
of the year
Month/day 131H
Hour/minute 1234H
Second 56H
Day of the week One of the following values is stored in BCD code. 6H
Sunday: 0, Monday: 1, Tuesday: 2, Wednesday: 3
Thursday: 4, Friday: 5, Saturday: 6
Millisecond (upper) Stored in BCD code. 7H
Millisecond (lower) 89H 4
*1 Value stored when an error occurs at [Link].789 on Saturday, January 31, 2015
The start address of the error history where the latest error has been stored can be checked in 'Latest address of error history'
(Un\G2).
The start address of the alarm history where the latest alarm has been stored can be checked in 'Latest address of alarm
history' (Un\G4).

Ex.
When the third error occurred
The third error is stored in Error history No. 3 and 3620 (the start address of Error history No.3) is stored in 'Latest address of
error history' (Un\G2).

"Latest address of error history"

(Un\G2): 3620

Un\G3600 Error history No. 1

1st error

Un\G3610 Error history No. 2

2nd error

Latest
Un\G3620 Error history No. 3
3rd error
(Open)

Un\G3750
Error history No. 16

(Open)

4 FUNCTION
4.36 Error History Function 65
 Ex.
When the 17th error occurred
The 17th error is stored in Error history No. 17 and 3600 (the start address of Error history No. 1) is stored in 'Latest address
of error history' (Un\G2).

"Latest address of error history"

(Un\G2): 3600

Latest
Un\G3600 Error history No. 1
17th error
1st error

Un\G3610 Error history No. 2

2nd error

Un\G3620 Error history No. 3

3rd error

Un\G3750
Error history No. 16

16th error

• When the storage areas for the error history are full, data in 'Error history No.1' (Un\G3600 to Un\G3609) is
overwritten in order and recording of error history continues. The history data before the data overwriting is
deleted.
• The same process is implemented in the alarm history.
• The registered error history is cleared by turning OFF of the temperature control module or resetting the
CPU module.

4 FUNCTION
66 4.36 Error History Function
4.37 FX3 Allocation Mode Function
The temperature control module buffer memory addresses can be arranged in the same way as for FX3U-4LC.
Sequence programs proven with the FX3U-4LC can be used.

Operation
In FX3 allocation mode, broad program corrections are not required during FX3 program appropriation as the buffer memory
allocations are the same as for FX3U-4LC.
Further, in FX3 allocation mode, the temperature adjustment settings can be set from the parameters.

Setting method
4
Configure the settings as described below.

1. When adding a new module, select a module whose name has "(FX3)" after its module model name.
[Navigation]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  Right-click  [Add New Module]

2. Set parameters in the same way as in normal mode.

3. Write the parameters to the module, and then either reset or turn OFFON the power supply.

• It is not possible to switch between normal mode and FX3 allocation mode during operations.
• "Temperature control trace" in the module tools is not compatible with FX3 allocation mode.

4 FUNCTION
4.37 FX3 Allocation Mode Function 67
 5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

5.1 Overall Configuration

Temperature sensor
(Model K Thermocouple)
Process value (PV)
Heater current process value
Temperature tank

FX5 CPU module FX5-4LC

Current sensor Heater
(CTL-6-P-H)

Manipulated value (MV)

Solid State Relay

Temperature sensor
For details on the usable temperature sensors, refer to the following.
Page 14 SPECIFICATIONS

Current sensor (CT)

Usable current sensors (CT) are described below.
Model Inquiries
CTL-12-S36-8 (0.0 to 100.0 A) U.R.D. Co., Ltd.
CTL-12-S36-10 (0.0 to 100.0 A)
CTL-12-S56-10 (0.0 to 100.0 A)
CTL-12L-8 (0.0 to 100.0 A)
CTL-6-P (0.0 to 30.0 A)
CTL-6-P-H (0.0 to 30.0 A)
CTL-6-S-H (0.0 to 30.0 A)

For details on the current sensors (CT) selection, refer to the following.
Page 62 Heater Disconnection Detection Function

5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
68 5.1 Overall Configuration
MEMO

5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 Overall Configuration 69
 6 WIRING
This section explains the temperature control module wiring.

6.1 Spring Clamp Terminal Block

Suitable wiring
The wires to connect the spring clamp terminal block are described below.
No. of wire per terminal Wire size
Single wire, Strand wire Ferrule with insulation sleeve
One wire AWG24 to 16 AWG23 to 19
(0.2 to 1.5 mm2) (0.25 to 0.75 mm2)

Wire end treatment

When not using a ferrule, strip the cable about 10 mm from the tip and connect it as a strand wire so that the wires do not
separate. When using a ferrule, strip the cable about 10 mm from the tip to connect a wire ferrule at the striped area. Failure
to do so may result in electric shock or short circuit between adjacent terminals because of the conductive part. If the wire strip
length is too short, it may result in the unstable connection to the spring clamp terminal part.
Depending on the thickness of the sheath, it may be difficult to insert into the insulation sleeve, so select the wires by referring
to the specifications in the diagram.
Strand wire/single wire Ferrule with insulation sleeve

Insulation sleeve Contact area

(Crimp area)

10 mm 10 mm

2 to 2.8 mm 16 to 18 mm

The following table shows wire ferrules and tools for wire ferrules compatible with the terminal block. Use of items other than
these may result in not being able to remove the wire ferrule, so carefully check that the wire ferrule can be unplugged.
<Reference product>
Manufacturer Model Wire size Crimp tool
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG AI 0.5-10 WH 0.5 mm2 CRIMPFOX 6
AI 0.75-10 GY 0.75 mm2
A 1.0-10 1.0 mm2
A 1.5-10 1.5 mm2

6 WIRING
70 6.1 Spring Clamp Terminal Block
Connecting a cable
■When ferrules with insulation sleeve are used
Insert a wire with the ferrule with insulation sleeve into the wire insertion opening and push the wire.

■When stranded wires and solid wires are used

Push the open/close button of the terminal block with a flathead screwdriver. While pushing the open/close button, insert the
wire into the insertion opening until the wire reaches the back, and then release the open/close button.
<Reference>
Manufacturer Model
PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co. KG SZS 0.42.5 VDE

Precautions
Then, pull the wire lightly and check that it is clamped securely.

Disconnecting a cable
Push the open/close button of the wire to be disconnected with a flathead screwdriver. Pull out the wire with the open/close
button pushed.
6

6 WIRING
6.1 Spring Clamp Terminal Block 71
 6.2 Terminals Layout

OUT1 OUT3
OUT2 OUT4
OUT
COM1 COM2
NC NC
CT CT
CH1 A B/TC+/VL+
B b/TC-/VL-
CT CT
CH2 A B/TC+/VL+
B b/TC-/VL-
CT CT
CH3 A B/TC+/VL+
B b/TC-/VL-
CT CT
CH4 A B/TC+/VL+
B b/TC-/VL-

Terminal name Description

OUT OUT1 CH1 Transistor output (Control outputs, alert outputs)
OUT2 CH12 Transistor output (Control outputs, alert outputs)
COM1 COM for OUT1 and OUT2
NC 
OUT3 CH3 Transistor output (Control outputs, alert outputs)
OUT4 CH4 Transistor output (Control outputs, alert outputs)
COM2 COM for OUT3 and OUT4
NC 
CH1 CT CT input
A Platinum resistance thermometer A inputs
B Short-circuit this terminal and b when using 2-wire platinum resistance thermometer
CT CT input
B/TC+/VL+ Platinum resistance thermometer B/thermocouple + /low-voltage VL + inputs
b/TC-/VL- Platinum resistance thermometer b/thermocouple - /low-voltage VL - inputs
CH2 CT CT input
A Platinum resistance thermometer A inputs
B Short-circuit this terminal and b when using 2-wire platinum resistance thermometer
CT CT input
B/TC+/VL+ Platinum resistance thermometer B/thermocouple + /low-voltage VL + inputs
b/TC-/VL- Platinum resistance thermometer b/thermocouple - /low-voltage VL - inputs
CH3 CT CT input
A Platinum resistance thermometer A inputs
B Short-circuit this terminal and b when using 2-wire platinum resistance thermometer
CT CT input
B/TC+/VL+ Platinum resistance thermometer B/thermocouple + /low-voltage VL + inputs
b/TC-/VL- Platinum resistance thermometer b/thermocouple - /low-voltage VL - inputs
CH4 CT CT input
A Platinum resistance thermometer A inputs
B Short-circuit this terminal and b when using 2-wire platinum resistance thermometer
CT CT input
B/TC+/VL+ Platinum resistance thermometer B/thermocouple + /low-voltage VL + inputs
b/TC-/VL- Platinum resistance thermometer b/thermocouple - /low-voltage VL - inputs

6 WIRING
72 6.2 Terminals Layout
6.3 Power Supply Wiring

Power connector layout

(Green)
(Black)
(Red)

Power supply wiring

(1) Red
(2) Black
Temperature
(3) Green
control module
(1 )(2 )(3 )

6
24 V DC
Grounding
(Ground resistance: 100 Ω or less.)

Grounding
Perform the following.
• Perform class D grounding (Grounding resistance: 100  or less).
• Ground the programmable controller independently when possible.
• If the programmable controller cannot be grounded independently, perform the "Shared grounding" shown below.

Other Other Other

PLC equipment PLC PLC equipment
equipment

Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding

(Best condition) (Good condition) (Not allowed)

• Bring the grounding point close to the PLC as much as possible so that the ground cable can be shortened.

6 WIRING
6.3 Power Supply Wiring 73
 6.4 External Wiring Example
An external wiring example is shown below.

Thermocouple
For thermocouples usable with the temperature control module, refer toPage 15 Input specifications.

Temperature
control module
24 V DC +
-

Grounding
(Ground resistance: 100 Ω or less)

Compensating
Thermocouple lead wire CH
TC+
TC-
Shielded wire

CH: represents the channel number.

Precautions
When using a thermocouple, use specified compensating lead wires.

Resistance thermometer
For resistance thermometer usable with the temperature control module, refer toPage 15 Input specifications.
Pt100 (3-wire type) or Pt1000 (3-wire type) Pt1000 (2-wire type)

Temperature Temperature
control module control module
24 V DC + 24 V DC +
- -

Grounding Grounding
(Ground resistance: 100 Ω or less) (Ground resistance: 100 Ω or less)
Pt100 or Pt1000 CH Pt1000 CH
A A
B B
b Shielded wire B
Shielded wire b

CH: represents the channel number. CH: represents the channel number.

Precautions
• When using a resistance thermometer, use lead wires of equal, low resistance.
• Make sure to short-circuit the [B] and [b] terminals when a 2-wire resistance thermometer is input.

6 WIRING
74 6.4 External Wiring Example
Micro voltage input
For the micro voltage input range usable with the temperature control module, refer toPage 15 Input specifications.

Temperature
control module

24 V DC +
-

Grounding
(Ground resistance: 100  or less)
Voltage input
CH
VL+
VL
Shielded wire

CH: represents the channel number.

6
Outputs wiring example
Internal transistor outputs are NPN open collector transistor outputs.
For output specifications, refer toPage 17 Output specifications.

Temperature
control module
24 V DC +
-

Grounding
(Ground resistance:
100 Ω or less)
Load OUT1
Load OUT2
COM1

Load OUT3
Load OUT4
COM2

6 WIRING
6.4 External Wiring Example 75
 Current detector (CT) wiring example
For current detector, refer toPage 16 Current detector (CT) input specifications.

Temperature
control module
+
24 V DC
-
Grounding
(Ground
resistance:
100 Ω or less)
OUT1

COM1

CT
CT
Shielded wire
Controlled
object

6 WIRING
76 6.4 External Wiring Example
7 PARAMETER SETTING
Set the parameters of each channel.
By setting parameters, the parameter setting by program is not needed.

When adding a temperature control module, FX3 allocation mode is usable if a module with the suffix "(FX3)"
after its name is selected.
• FX5-4LC: Normal mode
• FX5-4LC (FX3): FX3 allocation mode
This chapter describes normal mode.

7.1 Base Setting

Setting method
1. Configure the settings in "Base Setting" of the engineering tool.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Base Setting]

2. Double-click the item to change the setting, and enter a set value.
• Items where a value is selected from a drop-down list
Clicking the [] button of the item to be set displays the drop-down list. Select the item.
• Items where a value is entered into a text box
Double-click the item to be set, and enter a value.

7 PARAMETER SETTING
7.1 Base Setting 77
 7.2 Application Setting

Setting method
1. Configure the settings in "Application Setting" of the engineering tool.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Application
Setting]

2. Double-click the item to change the setting, and enter a set value.
• Items where a value is selected from a drop-down list
Clicking the [] button of the item to be set displays the drop-down list. Select the item.
• Items where a value is entered into a text box
Double-click the item to be set, and enter a value.

7 PARAMETER SETTING
78 7.2 Application Setting
7.3 CT Setting

Setting method
1. Configure the settings in "CT setting" of the engineering tool.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [CT setting]

7
2. Double-click the item to change the setting, and enter a set value.
• Items where a value is selected from a drop-down list
Clicking the [] button of the item to be set displays the drop-down list. Select the item.
• Items where a value is entered into a text box
Double-click the item to be set, and enter a value.

7 PARAMETER SETTING
7.3 CT Setting 79
 7.4 Refresh Setting

Setting method
Set the buffer memory areas of the temperature control module to be automatically refreshed.
Configuring the refresh settings eliminates the need of a program for reading/writing data.
1. Start parameters.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  Target module  [Module Parameter]  [Refresh]

2. Double-click the item to be set, and enter a value.

7 PARAMETER SETTING
80 7.4 Refresh Setting
8 PROGRAMMING
This section explains the temperature control module programming procedures and basic programs.

8.1 Programming Procedure

Create a program to implement the temperature control module using the following procedure.

1. Set the parameters.

2. Create the program.

Standard PID control

System configuration
A system configuration example is described below.
(1) (2)

(1) CPU module (FX5U CPU module)

(2) Temperature control module (FX5-4LC)

8 PROGRAMMING
8.1 Programming Procedure 81
 Parameter settings
Connect GX Works3 to the CPU module to set the parameters.

In the program example, default parameters are used for the parameters that have not been set. For the
parameters, refer to the following.
Page 77 PARAMETER SETTING

■Setting modules
1. Set the CPU module as described below.
[Project]  [New]

2. Click the [OK] button as shown below.

3. Set FX5-4LC as described below.

[Navigation]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  Right-click  [Add New Module]

8 PROGRAMMING
82 8.1 Programming Procedure
4. Click the [OK] button as shown below.

■Setting temperature control module parameters

1. Set the "Base Setting" contents as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-4LC]  [Module Parameter]  [Base Setting]

8 PROGRAMMING
8.1 Programming Procedure 83
 2. Set the "Application Setting" contents as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-4LC]  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]
• "Control basic parameters"
Set the CH1 "Target Value (SV) Setting" as shown in the diagram below.

• "Limiter setting"
Set the CH1 "Upper Limit Setting Limiter" as shown in the diagram below.

• "Alert setting"
Set the CH1 "Alert 1 mode setting" and "Alert set value 1" as shown in the diagram below.

Use the default values for parameters not described above.

■Writing to the CPU module

1. Write the set parameters to the CPU module, and then either reset the CPU module or turn OFFON the power supply.
[Online]  [Write to PLC]

8 PROGRAMMING
84 8.1 Programming Procedure
Auto tuning
Implement auto tuning.
[Tool]  [Module Tool List]
1. Select "Temperature trace" in "Temperature
Control Module" and click the [OK] button.

2. Select FX5-4LC, and click the [OK] button.

3. Select "Monitor data write" from the items

described below.
[Setting]  [Monitor data write]

4. Set "Setting/Operation mode command" to "1:

Operation mode command".
5. Set "Auto tuning command" to "1: ON".

6. Set "Auto tuning command" to "1: ON", "Auto

tuning status" becomes "Implementing" and
the auto tuning starts.
7. When the auto tuning is completed, "Auto
tuning status" becomes "Stopped".
8. The temperature control is implemented with
the set PID constants.

8 PROGRAMMING
8.1 Programming Procedure 85
 Program example
Classification Label Name Description Device
Module label FX5LC_1.stOutput_D.bSettingChangeCommand_D Setting change command U1\G399, b11
FX5LC_1.stOutput_D.bSettingOperationModeCommand_D Setting/operation mode command U1\G399, b1
FX5LC_1.stInput_D.bModuleREADY_D Module ready flag U1\G398, b0
FX5LC_1.stnMonitor_Ch_D[0].uAlertDefinition_D.8 CH1 Alert definition U1\G401, b8
FX5LC_1.stnMonitor_Ch_D[0].wTemperatureProcessValue_D CH1 Temperature process value U1\G402
(PV)
FX5LC_1.stErrorInfo_D.uErrorOccurrenceAddress_D Error occurrence address U1\G1
FX5LC_1.stErrorInfo_D.uLatestErrorCode_D Latest error code U1\G0
FX5LC_1.stOutput_D.bErrorResetCommand_D Error reset command U1\G399, b2

■Program to change the setting/operation mode

■Processing program when an upper limit inputs alert occurs

■Program to clear the error code display

8 PROGRAMMING
86 8.1 Programming Procedure
Heating-cooling PID control

System configuration
A system configuration example is described below.
(1) (2)

(1) CPU module (FX5U CPU module)

(2) Temperature control module (FX5-4LC)

Parameter settings
Connect GX Works3 to the CPU module to set the parameters. 8
In the program example, default parameters are used for the parameters that have not been set. For the
parameters, refer to the following.
Page 77 PARAMETER SETTING

■Setting modules
For the module setting method, refer to the following.
Page 82 Setting modules

8 PROGRAMMING
8.1 Programming Procedure 87
 ■Setting temperature control module parameters
1. Set the "Base Setting" contents as described below.
[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-4LC]  [Module Parameter]  [Base Setting]
• "Control mode selection"
Set the "Control mode selection" as shown in the diagram below.

2. Set the "Application Setting" contents as described below.

[Navigation window]  [Parameter]  [Module Information]  [FX5-4LC]  [Module Parameter]  [Application Setting]
• "Control basic parameters"
Set the CH1 "Target Value (SV) Setting" as shown in the diagram below.

• "Heating/cooling control setting"

Set the CH1 "Overlap/dead band setting" as shown in the diagram below.

• "Alert setting"
Set the CH1 "Alert 1 mode setting" and "Alert set value 1" as shown in the diagram below.

Use the default values for parameters not described above.

8 PROGRAMMING
88 8.1 Programming Procedure
■Writing to the CPU module
For writing to the CPU module, refer to the following.

Auto tuning
For the auto tuning procedure, refer to the following.
Page 85 Auto tuning

Program example
For the program example, refer to the following.
Page 86 Program example

8 PROGRAMMING
8.1 Programming Procedure 89
 9 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes errors that may occur when the temperature control module is used and troubleshooting.

9.1 Checks with LEDs

By checking the display status of LEDs, the problem can be primarily diagnosed without GX Works3 and the cause is
narrowed down.
A state of the temperature control module can be checked with the POWER LED, RUN LED, and ERROR LED. The following
table shows the correspondence between each LED status and each state of the temperature control module.
Name Description
POWER LED Shows the power supply status.
ON: Power supply is ON
OFF: Power supply is OFF or a module error has occurred
RUN LED Shows the operations status.
ON: Normal operation
OFF: Error has occurred
ERROR LED Shows the error status.
ON: Mild or critical error has occurred
Flashing: Moderate or critical error has occurred
OFF: Normal operation

The POWER LED has turned OFF

When the POWER LED turns OFF, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
Is the power supplied? Check that the supplied voltage is within the rated range.
Is the capacity insufficient? Calculate the current consumption, and check that the power capacity is not insufficient.

The RUN LED has turned OFF

When the RUN LED turns OFF, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
Is the power supplied external 24 V DC? (During Check that the external voltage supply is within the rated range.
startup only)
Is the temperature control module mounted Check the mounting status of the temperature control module.
correctly? (During startup only)
Other than above Reset the CPU module, and check that the RUN LED is ON.
If the RUN LED is not ON, it is possible that the module is malfunctioning. Consult your local Mitsubishi
representative, dealer, or branch office to explain the failure symptoms.

When the ERROR LED turns on or flashes

When the ERROR LED turns OFF, check the following items.
Check item Corrective action
Has an error occurred? Check 'Latest error code' (Un\G0), and take a corrective action described in List of Error Codes.
Page 92 List of Error Codes

9 TROUBLESHOOTING
90 9.1 Checks with LEDs
9.2 Checks When Trouble Occurs
Errors detected by the temperature control module are stored in the buffer memory 'flag' (Un\G360) and 'event' (Un\G429).
9
For the flags and events, refer to the following.
Page 123 Flag
Page 134 CH1 Event
Either monitor the error buffer memory using GX Works3, or read the errors using the FROM command (or specify buffer
memory directly), and check the error details.

Checks using flags

The 'flag' (Un\G360) bit that describes the errors is as described below.
Bit Error details Error cause Error code
b0 Error detected Turns ON when the following b1 to b10 errors occur.  (Other than 0)
b1 Set value range error Turns ON when data outside the settings range is written. 1950H
Further, the buffer memory number in which the error occurred is stored in
the "Error occurrence address".
b2 24 V DC power supply error Turns ON when the external 24 V DC power is not supplied. 1F08H
b3 Set value backup error flag Turns ON when an error occurs due to noise, a malfunction occurs in the 1AF9H
temperature control module, or the backup command turns OFF during
backup.
If the status does not improve even after the power supply is turned ON
again, contact the closest Mitsubishi Electric representative.
b4 CH1 AT/ST error completion flag Turns ON when CH1 AT (auto tuning) or ST (startup tuning) finish with an 1A7H
error. 1A8H
1A9H
b5 CH1 AT/ST error completion flag Turns ON when CH2 AT (auto tuning) or ST (startup tuning) finish with an
1AAH
error.
1ABH
b6 CH1 AT/ST error completion flag Turns ON when CH3 AT (auto tuning) or ST (startup tuning) finish with an 1ACH
error. : CH number
b7 CH1 AT/ST error completion flag Turns ON when CH4 AT (auto tuning) or ST (startup tuning) finish with an
error.
b8 Adjustment data error sumcheck error Turns ON when an error occurs due to noise or a malfunction occurs in the 3001H
b9 Cold contact temperature compensation temperature control module.
data error If the status does not improve even after the power supply is turned ON
again, contact the closest Mitsubishi Electric representative.
b10 A/D converter error

Checks using events

The 'event' (Un\G429) bit that describes the errors is as described below.
Bit Error details Error cause Alarm codes/
Error codes
b0 Input error (upper limit) Turns ON when the input value is over scale. 080H
b1 Input error (lower limit) Turns ON when the input value is under scale. 081H
b2 Cold contact temperature compensation Turns ON when an error occurs due to noise or a malfunction occurs in the 3001H
data error temperature control module.
If the status does not improve even after the power supply is turned ON
b3 A/D converter error
again, contact the closest Mitsubishi Electric representative.
b4 Alert 1 Turns ON when alert 1 occurs. 084H
b5 Alert 2 Turns ON when alert 2 occurs. 085H
b6 Alert 3 Turns ON when alert 3 occurs. 086H
b7 Alert 4 Turns ON when alert 4 occurs. 087H
b8 Loop disconnection alert Turns ON when a loop disconnection alert occurs. 089H
b9 Heater disconnection alert Turns ON when a heater disconnection alert occurs. 088H
b10 Current error while outputs are OFF Turns ON when a current error occurs while outputs are OFF. 08AH

9 TROUBLESHOOTING
9.2 Checks When Trouble Occurs 91
 9.3 List of Error Codes
If an error occurs in operation of the temperature control module, the error code of the error is stored into 'Latest error code'
(Un\G0) of the buffer memory and 'Error flag' (Un\G398, b2) turns ON. Further, an error address is stored in 'Error occurrence
address' (Un\G1).
Turning ON 'Error reset command' (Un\G399, b2) clears the error code in 'Latest error code' (Un\G0), and 'Error flag'
(Un\G398, b2) turns OFF.
The following table lists the error codes to be stored.
 in error codes: This symbol indicates the number of the channel where an error has occurred. (1: CH1, 2: CH2, 3: CH3, 4:
CH4)
Error code Error name Cause and description Action
(HEX)
1900H Write error in Writing a value to the area where writing is allowed only in Follow the instructions below to reset the error.
operation mode the setting mode was attempted in the operation mode. 1: Change the mode to the setting mode.
2: Set the correct value and turn OFFONOFF
'Setting change command' (Un\G399, b11).
If in FX3 allocation mode, turn OFFONOFF the error
reset command to reset the settings range error address.
1910H Set value The current control mode is different from the one backed Turn OFFONOFF 'Setting value backup command'
discrepancy error up in the non-volatile memory because the control mode (Un\G399, b8).
(control mode) was changed.
1940H Setting change The setting value has been changed while 'Default setting After turning OFFONOFF 'Error reset command'
error during default registration command' (Un\G399, b9) is ON. (Un\G399, b2), change the set value.
setting registration
1950H Setting out of Data out of the setting range is being written.*1 Set data within the range.
range error If in FX3 allocation mode, turn OFFONOFF the error
reset command to reset the settings range error address.
1A0H CH Upper/lower The value set in CH Lower limit output limiter is equal to Set the value so that the upper limit value is greater than
limit output limiter or greater than the value set in CH Upper limit output the lower limit value.
setting error limiter. If in FX3 allocation mode, turn OFFONOFF the error
reset command to reset the settings range error address.
1A1H CH Upper/lower The value set in CH upper limit setting limiter and CH Set the value so that the upper limit value is greater than
limit setting limiter lower limit setting limiter becomes lower limit value upper the lower limit value.
setting error limit value. If in FX3 allocation mode, turn OFFONOFF the error
reset command to reset the settings range error address.
1A7H CH Auto tuning The AT point (= Set value (SV) + AT bias) fluctuated After turning OFFONOFF 'Error reset command'
error within the upper/lower limit setting limiter range. (Un\G399, b2), implement the auto tuning again
considering the following points.
• Set the AT bias so that the temperature process value
(PV) during AT does not get out of the input range.
• Check the upper limit output limiter value. If the value is
100% or greater, change the value.
• Change the input range to widen the measured
temperature range.
1A8H CH Auto tuning The AT point (= Set value (SV) + AT bias) fluctuated After turning OFF→ON→OFF 'Error reset command'
error within the upper/lower limit setting limiter range. (Un\G399, b2), set a set value (SV), an AT point, or an
upper/lower limit setting limiter so that the set value (SV)
or the AT point is within the upper/lower limit setting limiter
range, and implement auto tuning again.
1A9H CH Auto tuning The proportional band has been set to 0. After turning OFFONOFF 'Error reset command'
error (Un\G399, b2), set the proportional band to a value other
than 0, and implement auto tuning again.
1AAH CH Auto tuning Settings of the buffer memory areas where changing the After turning OFFONOFF 'Error reset command'
error settings is not allowed have been changed. (Un\G399, b2), implement auto tuning again. While auto
tuning is being implemented, do not change the settings
of the buffer memory areas.

9 TROUBLESHOOTING
92 9.3 List of Error Codes
Error code Error name Cause and description Action
(HEX)
1ABH CH Auto tuning
error
The auto tuning error judgment time has been
exceeded.*2
After turning OFFONOFF 'Error reset command'
(Un\G399, b2), set the auto tuning error judgment time
9
longer, and implement auto tuning again.
■When the temperature process value (PV) does not
reach the set value (SV) while the control output is ON
• Check the heater has been turned ON.
• Check the upper limit output limiter value, and if the
value is less than 100%, change the value.
■When the temperature process value (PV) does not
reach the set value (SV) while the control output is OFF
• If the value is greater than 0%, change the value.
• The temperatures of the controlled objects may not fall
due to effects of the environment, so stop the control of
the adjacent controlled objects, and implement the auto
tuning for each controlled object.
If the error still cannot be solved after the above actions
are taken, manually set the PID constants. Alternatively,
change the heater capacity.
1ACH CH Auto tuning The PID constants calculation value is out of the After turning OFFONOFF 'Error reset command'
error allowable range. (Un\G399, b2), take the following actions depending on
the situation.
■Proportional band = 1
Error reason: The amplitude of the control response
during AT is small.
• Check the upper limit output limiter value, and if the
value is less than 100%, change the value.
• If the value is greater than 0%, change the value.
• Change the input range to narrow the measured
temperature range.
■Proportional band = 10000
Error reason: The amplitude of the control response
during AT is large.
• Change the upper limit output limiter value and the
lower limit output limiter value to reduce the amplitude
of the control response during AT.
■Integral time = 1
Error reason: The vibration cycle of the control response
during AT is short.
• Set the upper limit output limiter larger and the lower
limit output limiter smaller.
■Integral time = 3600
Error reason: The vibration cycle of the control response
during AT is long.
• Check the primary delay digital filter value and change
it if necessary.
• Check the value for number of moving average and
change it if necessary.
[When the temperature process value (PV) does not
decrease after exceeding the set value (SV)]
• If the value is greater than 0%, change the value.
• The temperatures of the controlled objects may not fall
due to effects of the environment, so stop the control of
the adjacent controlled objects, and implement auto
tuning for each controlled object.
[When the temperature process value (PV) does not
increase after exceeding the set value (SV)]
• Check the upper limit output limiter value, and if the
value is less than 100%, change the value.
■Differential time = 3600
Error reason: The vibration cycle of the control response
during AT is long.
• Set the integral time to 3600 or a smaller value.

9 TROUBLESHOOTING
9.3 List of Error Codes 93
 Error code Error name Cause and description Action
(HEX)
1AF9H Backup errors A read/write error to non-volatile memory occurred, or the ■If the error occurs when the power supply is turned ON
buffer memory arrange moment mode (normal mode, FX3 (i.e., when reading from non-volatile memory)
assignment mode) was changed. Turn OFFON the power supply. If the same error
display occurs again, turn OFFONOFF 'Set value
backup command' (Un\G399, b8).
■If the error occurs during backup using set value backup
commands, or when the buffer memory arrangement
mode (normal mode, FX3 assignment mode) is changed
Turn OFFONOFF 'Setting value backup command'
(Un\G399, b8). If the same error occurs again, the
possible cause is a module failure. Consult your local
Mitsubishi representative, dealer, or branch office to
explain the failure symptoms.
1F08H 24 V DC external 24 V DC external power supply is not normally supplied to Check the cable wiring and supplied voltage.
power supply error the temperature control module. After checking, turn OFFONOFF 'Error reset
command' (Un\G399, b2).
If the same error occurs again, the possible cause is a
module failure. Consult your local Mitsubishi
representative, dealer, or branch office to explain the
failure symptoms.
3001H Hardware failure A hardware failure has occurred in the temperature • Turn OFFON the power supply.
control module. If the same error occurs again again, the possible cause
is a temperature control module failure. Consult your local
Mitsubishi representative, dealer, or branch office to
explain the failure symptoms.

*1 The address of buffer memory area where a value out of the setting range is set can be checked with 'Error occurrence address'
(Un\G1).
*2 If "Setting change rate limiter setting" is not 0, the time monitoring starts when Set value (SV) monitor becomes equal to the AT point.

9.4 List of Alarm Codes

If an alarm occurs in operation of the temperature control module, the alarm code of the alarm is stored into 'Latest alarm
code' (Un\G3) of the buffer memory. Turning OFFONOFF 'Error reset command' (Un\G399, b2) clears the alarm code in
'Latest alarm code' (Un\G3).
Alarm code : This symbol describes the number of the channel where an alarm has occurred. (1: CH1, 2: CH2, 3: CH3, 4:
CH4)
Alarm code Alarm name Cause and description Action
(HEX)
080H CH Process value (PV) out of input The temperature process value (PV) After the temperature process value (PV) falls within
range (upper limit) has exceeded the temperature the setting range, turn OFFONOFF 'Error reset
measuring range that was set as the command' (Un\G399, b2) to clear the alarm code
input range. stored in 'Latest alarm code' (Un\G3).
After the temperature process value (PV) falls within
081H CH Process value (PV) out of input The temperature process value (PV)
the setting range, the corresponding bit of the
range (lower limit) has fallen below the temperature
warning occurrence contents and 'CH Alert flag'
measuring range that was set as the
(Un\G398, b12 to 15) automatically turn OFF.
input range.
084H CH Alert 1 Alert 1 has occurred. After the temperature process value (PV) is restored
085H CH Alert 2 Alert 2 has occurred. from the alert status, turn OFFONOFF 'Error
reset command' (Un\G3) to clear the alarm code
086H CH Alert 3 Alert 3 has occurred. stored in 'Latest alarm code' (Un\G3).
087H CH Alert 4 Alert 4 has occurred. After the temperature process value (PV) is restored
from the alert status, the corresponding bit of the
warning occurrence and 'CH Alert flag' (Un\G398,
b12 to 15) automatically turn OFF.
088H CH Heater disconnection detection A heater disconnection has been After the detected disconnection or the detected
detected. output off-time current error is resolved, turn
089H CH Loop disconnection detection A loop disconnection has been OFFONOFF 'Error reset command' (Un\G399,
b2) to clear the alarm code stored in 'Latest alarm
detected.
code' (Un\G3).
08AH CH Output OFF-time current error An output off-time current error has After the detected disconnection or the detected
detection been detected. output OFF-time current error is resolved, the
corresponding bit of the warning occurrence and
'CH Alert flag' (Un\G398, b12 to 15) automatically
turn OFF.

9 TROUBLESHOOTING
94 9.4 List of Alarm Codes
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 External Dimensions
This chapter describes the external dimensions of the temperature control module.

80 (Mounting hole pitch)

90

19 8
60 19.2 83

(Unit: mm)

APPX
Appendix 1 External Dimensions 95
 Appendix 2 Standards
Certification of UL, cUL standards
The FX5-4LC supports UL (UL, cUL) standards.
UL, cUL file number: E95239
For models that support UL standards, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Compliance with EC directive (CE Marking)

This note does not guarantee that an entire machine produced in accordance with the contents of this note will comply with
the following standards.
Compliance to EMC directive and LVD directive of the entire mechanical module should be checked by the user/
manufacturer. For more details please contact to the local Mitsubishi Electric sales site.

Requirement for compliance with EMC directive

The following products have shown compliance through direct testing (of the identified standards below) and design analysis
(through the creation of a technical construction file) to the European Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility (2014/30/
EU) when used as directed by the appropriate documentation.

Attention
This product is designed for use in industrial applications.

Product compatibility
Type: Programmable controller (open type equipment)
Models: FX5 manufactured
from April 1st, 2017 FX5-4LC

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directive Remarks

EN61131-2:2007 Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard.
- Equipment requirements and tests EMI
• Radiated emission
• Conducted emission
EMS
• Radiated electromagnetic field
• Fast transient burst
• Electrostatic discharge
• High-energy surge
• Voltage drops and interruptions
• Conducted RF
• Power frequency magnetic field

APPX
96 Appendix 2 Standards
 If accuracy in measuring and control is required when using in an environment exposed to electrical stress,
such as an EMS test, implementing the following details is recommended.
For users of proprietary cables (dedicated for sensors or actuators), these users should follow those
manufacturers' installation requirements.
Mitsubishi Electric recommends that shielded cables be used. If no other EMC protection is provided, users
may experience temporary loss of accuracy between +10%/-10% in very heavy industrial areas.
However, Mitsubishi Electric suggests that if adequate EMC precautions are followed with general good EMC
practice for the user's complete control system, users should expect normal errors as specified in this manual.
• Sensitive analog cables should not be laid in the same trunking or cable conduit as high voltage cabling.
Where possible, users should run analog cables separately.
• Good cable shielding should be used. When terminating the shield at Earth - ensure that no earth loops are
accidentally created.
• When reading analog values, EMC induced errors can be smoothed out by averaging the readings. This
can be achieved either through functions on the analog devices or through a user's program.

Compliance with UKCA marking

The requirements for compliance with UKCA marking are the same as that with EC directive (CE marking).

APPX
Appendix 2 Standards 97
 Appendix 3 Module Label
The buffer memory of the temperature control module can be set by using module labels.
Not compatible with FX3 allocation mode.

Module label configuration

The names of the module labels are defined using the following configuration.
"Module name"_"Module number"."Data type"_Ch ["(Channel)"]."Data format""Label name"_D

Ex.
FX5LC_1.stnMonitor_Ch[0].wTemperatureProcessValue_D

■Module name
The module name indicates the model of the module.

■Module number
The module number starts from one and increments for identifying modules with the same module name.

■Data type
The data type indicates the type of a buffer memory area. The following shows the classification.
Data type Description
stnMonitor Monitor
stnControl Control
stnSetting Setting

■Channel
This part indicates the channel number corresponding to a module label. A numerical value of 0 to 3 is stored to correspond to
CH1 to CH4.
(CH1: 0, CH2: 1, CH3: 2, CH4: 3)

■Data type
The data type indicates the size of a buffer memory area. The following shows the classification.
Data type Description
b Bit
u Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit]
w Word [Signed]
st Structure
z System area
n Array format (: b, u, w, st)

■Label name
The label name is unique by modules.

■_D
_D indicates that the module label is for direct access.
Type Description Access timing
Direct access Values that has been read from or written to module labels are immediately At reading/writing data from/to the module label
applied to the module. The run time of a program is longer than the one for auto
refresh. However, the responsiveness is high.

APPX
98 Appendix 3 Module Label
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
List of buffer memory addresses
The following table lists the buffer memory addresses of the temperature control module. For details on the buffer memory
addresses, refer to the following.
Page 117 Details of buffer memory addresses
The buffer memory areas of the temperature control module are classified into the following data types.
Data type Description
Setting data Description This data is set according to the connection devices and system applications.
Write/read attribute Data can be read and written from/to this area.
Setting method Set using either GX Works3 or a program.
Setting timing After changing values, turn OFFONOFF 'Setting change command' (Un\G399, b11) to
enable the set values.
Control Data Description Use this data to control the temperature control module.
Write/read attribute Data can be read and written from/to this area.
Setting method Set using either GX Works3 or a program.
Setting timing As soon as values are changed, the set values become effective.
Monitor data Description Use this data to monitor the status of the temperature control module.
Write/read attribute Reading data is only allowed.
Setting method 
Setting timing 

Among the buffer memory areas, do not write data in the system areas or the areas whose data types are
monitor data. Writing data into these areas can cause the malfunction of the module.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 99
 Using in normal mode
The following table describes the list of buffer memory addresses.

■Un\G0 to Un\G3919
Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
0(0H) All Latest error code 0 Monitor 
1(1H) All Error occurrence address 0 Monitor 
2(2H) All Latest address of error history 0 Monitor 
3(3H) All Latest alarm code 0 Monitor 
4(4H) All Latest address of alarm history 0 Monitor 
5 to 30  System area   
(5H to 1EH)
*1
31(1FH) All Firmware version Monitor 
32 to 36  System area   
(20H to 24H)
37(25H) All Control mode selection monitor 0 Monitor 
38(26H)  System area   
39(27H) All Automatic setting monitor at input range change 0 Monitor 
40 to 299  System area   
(28H to 12BH)
300 (12CH) All Control mode selection 0 Setting 
301(12DH)  System area   
302(12EH) All Automatic setting at input range change 0 Setting 
303 to 349  System area   
(12FH to 15DH)
350(15EH) GR1 SV tracking selection System area 1 Setting 
351(15FH) GR2 1 Setting 
352(160H) GR1 Cascade ON/OFF 0 Setting 
353(161H) GR2 0 Setting 
354(162H) GR1 Cascade gain 1000 Setting 
355(163H) GR2 1000 Setting 
356(164H) GR1 Cascade bias 0 Setting 
357(165H) GR2 0 Setting 
358(166H) GR1 Cascade monitor 0 Monitor 
359(167H) GR2 0 Monitor 
360(168H) All Flag (contents of Un\G0) 0 Monitor 
361 to 396  System area   
(169H to 18CH)
397(18DH) All Module information 61C0H Monitor 
398(18EH) All Input signal  Monitor 
399(18FH) All Output signal  Setting 
400(190H) CH1 Decimal point position 0 Monitor 
401(191H) CH1 Alert definition 0 Monitor 
402(192H) CH1 Temperature process value (PV) 0 Monitor 
403(193H) CH1 Manipulated value (MV) Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
(MVh)
404(194H) CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag 0 Monitor 
405(195H) CH1 Transistor output flag Heating transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
406(196H) CH1 Set value (SV) monitor 0 Monitor 
407(197H) CH1 Manipulated value (MV) for Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
output with another (external) (MVh) for output with another
analog module (external) analog module
408(198H) CH1 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc)

APPX
100 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
409(199H) CH1 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc) for output with another
(external) analog module
410(19AH) CH1 System area Cooling transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
411 to 428  System area   
(19BH to 1ACH)
429(1ADH) CH1 Event 0 Monitor 
430(1AEH) CH1 Set value (SV) setting 0 Control 
431(1AFH) CH1 Proportional band (P) setting Heating proportional band 30 Control 
(Ph) setting
432(1B0H) CH1 Integral time (I) setting 240 Control 
433(1B1H) CH1 Differential time (D) setting 60 Control 
434(1B2H) CH1 Alert set value 1 0 Control 
435(1B3H) CH1 Alert set value 2 0 Control 
436(1B4H) CH1 Alert set value 3 0 Control 
437(1B5H) CH1 Alert set value 4 0 Control 
438(1B6H) CH1 Temperature process value (PV) for input with another 0 Control 
(external) analog module
439(1B7H) CH1 System area Cooling proportional band 30 Control 
(Pc) setting
440 to 500  System area   
(1B8H to 1F4H)
501(1F5H) CH1 Input range 2 Setting 
502, 503  System area   
(1F6H, 1F7H)
504(1F8H) CH1 Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting
505(1F9H) CH1 Control response parameter 0 Setting  A
506(1FAH) CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting 10 Setting 
507(1FBH) CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 Setting 
508(1FCH) CH1 Upper limit output limiter Heating upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
509(1FDH) CH1 Lower limit output limiter System area 0 Setting 
510(1FEH) CH1 Output change ratio limiter System area 0 Setting 
511(1FFH) CH1 Upper limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
512(200H) CH1 Lower limit setting limiter -100 Setting 
513(201H) CH1 Setting variation rate limiter 0 Setting 
514(202H)  System area   
515(203H) CH1 Normal Operation/Reverse System area 1 Setting 
Operation Setting
516(204H) CH1 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting 10 Setting 
517(205H)  System area   
518(206H) CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift System area 0 Setting 
519(207H) CH1 Manual output setting System area -50 Setting 
520(208H)  System area   
521(209H) CH1 System area Cooling upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
522(20AH) CH1 System area Cooling control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting
523(20BH) CH1 System area Cooling method setting 0 Setting 
524(20CH) CH1 System area Overlap/dead band setting 0 Setting 
525 to 530  System area   
(20DH to 212H)
531(213H) CH1 Alert dead band setting 10 Setting 
532(214H) CH1 Number of alert delay 0 Setting 

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 101
 Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
533(215H) CH1 Alert 1 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
*2
534(216H) CH1 Alert 2 mode setting 0 Setting 
535(217H) CH1 Alert 3 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
*2
536(218H) CH1 Alert 4 mode setting 0 Setting 
537(219H) CH1 Loop disconnection detection System area 480 Setting 
judgment time
538(21AH) CH1 Loop disconnection detection System area 0 Setting 
dead band
539 to 545  System area   
(21BH to 221H)
546(222H) CH1 AT bias 0 Setting 
547(223H)  System area   
548(224H) CH1 Startup tuning implementation System area 0 Setting 
command
549 to 562  System area   
(225H to 232H)
563(233H) CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting 
564(234H)  System area   
565(235H) CH1 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting 
566 to 589  System area   
(236H to 24DH)
590(24EH) CH1 Operation mode setting 3 Setting 
591(24FH) CH1 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit 10000 Setting 
592(250H) CH1 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit 0 Setting 
593(251H) CH1 External input range upper limit 10000 Setting 
594(252H) CH1 External input range lower limit 0 Setting 
595(253H) CH1 External output range upper limit 10000 Setting 
596(254H) CH1 External output range lower limit 0 Setting 
597(255H) CH1 Transistor output functions selection 0 Setting 
598, 599  System area   
(256H, 257H)
600(258H) CH2 Decimal point position 0 Monitor 
601(259H) CH2 Alert definition 0 Monitor 
602(25AH) CH2 Temperature process value (PV) 0 Monitor 
603(25BH) CH2 Manipulated value (MV) Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
(MVh)
604(25CH) CH2 Temperature rise judgment flag 0 Monitor 
605(25DH) CH2 Transistor output flag Heating transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
606(25EH) CH2 Set value (SV) monitor 0 Monitor 
607(25FH) CH2 Manipulated value (MV) for Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
output with another (external) (MVh) for output with another
analog module (external) analog module
608(260H) CH2 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc)
609(261H) CH2 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc) for output with another
(external) analog module
610(262H) CH2 System area Cooling transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
611 to 629  System area   
(263H to 274H)
629(275H) CH2 Event  Monitor 
630(276H) CH2 Set value (SV) setting 0 Control 
631(277H) CH2 Proportional band (P) setting Heating proportional band 30 Control 
(Ph) setting
632(278H) CH2 Integral time (I) setting 240 Control 

APPX
102 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
633(279H) CH2 Differential time (D) setting 60 Control 
634(27AH) CH2 Alert set value 1 0 Control 
635(27BH) CH2 Alert set value 2 0 Control 
636(27CH) CH2 Alert set value 3 0 Control 
637(27DH) CH2 Alert set value 4 0 Control 
638(27EH) CH2 Temperature process value (PV) for input with another 0 Control 
(external) analog module
639(27FH) CH2 System area Cooling proportional band 30 Control 
(Pc) setting
640 to 700  System area   
(280H to 2BCH)
701(2BDH) CH2 Input range 2 Setting 
702, 703  System area   
(2BEH, 2BFH)
704(2C0H) CH2 Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting
705(2C1H) CH2 Control response parameter 0 Setting 
706(2C2H) CH2 Temperature rise completion range setting 10 Setting 
707(2C3H) CH2 Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 Setting 
708(2C4H) CH2 Upper limit output limiter Heating upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
709(2C5H) CH2 Lower limit output limiter System area 0 Setting 
710(2C6H) CH2 Output change ratio limiter System area 0 Setting 
711(2C7H) CH2 Upper limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
712(2C8H) CH2 Lower limit setting limiter -100 Setting 
713(2C9H) CH2 Setting variation rate limiter 0 Setting 
714(2CAH)  System area    A
715(2CBH) CH2 Normal Operation/Reverse System area 1 Setting 
Operation Setting
716(2CCH) CH2 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting 10 Setting 
717(2CDH)  System area   
718(2CEH) CH2 AUTO/MAN mode shift System area 0 Setting 
719(2CFH) CH2 Manual output setting System area -50 Setting 
720(2D0H)  System area   
721(2D1H) CH2 System area Cooling upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
722(2D2H) CH2 System area Cooling control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting
723(2D3H) CH2 System area Cooling method setting 0 Setting 
724(2D4H) CH2 System area Overlap/dead band setting 0 Setting 
725 to 730  System area   
(2D5H to 2DAH)
731(2DBH) CH2 Alert dead band setting 10 Setting 
732(2DCH) CH2 Number of alert delay 0 Setting 
733(2DDH) CH2 Alert 1 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
734(2DEH) CH2 Alert 2 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
735(2DFH) CH2 Alert 3 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
736(2E0H) CH2 Alert 4 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
737(2E1H) CH2 Loop disconnection detection System area 480 Setting 
judgment time
738(2E2H) CH2 Loop disconnection detection System area 0 Setting 
dead band
739 to 745  System area   
(2E3H to 2E9H)

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 103
 Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
746(2EAH) CH2 AT bias 0 Setting 
747(2EBH)  System area   
748(2ECH) CH2 Startup tuning implementation System area 0 Setting 
command
749 to 762  System area   
(2EDH to 2FAH)
763(2FBH) CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting 
764(2FCH)  System area   
765(2FDH) CH2 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting 
766 to 789  System area   
(2FEH to 315H)
790(316H) CH2 Operation mode setting 3 Setting 
791(317H) CH2 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit 10000 Setting 
792(318H) CH2 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit 0 Setting 
793(319H) CH2 External input range upper limit 10000 Setting 
794(31AH) CH2 External input range lower limit 0 Setting 
795(31BH) CH2 External output range upper limit 10000 Setting 
796(31CH) CH2 External output range lower limit 0 Setting 
797(31DH) CH2 Transistor output functions selection 0 Setting 
798, 799  System area   
(31EH, 31FH)
800(320H) CH3 Decimal point position 0 Monitor 
801(321H) CH3 Alert definition 0 Monitor 
802(322H) CH3 Temperature process value (PV) 0 Monitor 
803(323H) CH3 Manipulated value (MV) Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
(MVh)
804(324H) CH3 Temperature rise judgment flag 0 Monitor 
805(325H) CH3 Transistor output flag Heating transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
806(326H) CH3 Set value (SV) monitor 0 Monitor 
807(327H) CH3 Manipulated value (MV) for Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
output with another (external) (MVh) for output with another
analog module (external) analog module
808(328H) CH3 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc)
809(329H) CH3 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc) for output with another
(external) analog module
810(32AH) CH3 System area Cooling transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
811 to 828  System area   
(32BH to 33CH)
829(33DH) CH3 Event  Monitor 
830(33EH) CH3 Set value (SV) setting 0 Control 
831(33FH) CH3 Proportional band (P) setting 30 Control 
832(340H) CH3 Integral time (I) setting 240 Control 
833(341H) CH3 Differential time (D) setting 60 Control 
834(342H) CH3 Alert set value 1 0 Control 
835(343H) CH3 Alert set value 2 0 Control 
836(344H) CH3 Alert set value 3 0 Control 
837(345H) CH3 Alert set value 4 0 Control 
838(346H) CH3 Temperature process value (PV) for input with another 0 Control 
(external) analog module
839(347H) CH3 System area Cooling proportional band 30 Control 
(Pc) setting
840 to 900  System area   
(348H to 384H)

APPX
104 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
901(385H) CH3 Input range 2 Setting 
902, 903  System area   
(386H, 387H)
904(388H) CH3 Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting
905(389H) CH3 Control response parameter 0 Setting 
906(38AH) CH3 Temperature rise completion range setting 10 Setting 
907(38BH) CH3 Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 Setting 
908(38CH) CH3 Upper limit output limiter Heating upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
909(38DH) CH3 Lower limit output limiter System area 0 Setting 
910(38EH) CH3 Output change ratio limiter System area 0 Setting 
911(38FH) CH3 Upper limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
912(390H) CH3 Lower limit setting limiter -100 Setting 
913(391H) CH3 Setting variation rate limiter 0 Setting 
914(392H)  System area   
915(393H) CH3 Normal Operation/Reverse System area 1 Setting 
Operation Setting
916(394H) CH3 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting 10 Setting 
917(395H)  System area   
918(396H) CH3 AUTO/MAN mode shift System area 0 Setting 
919(397H) CH3 Manual output setting System area -50 Setting 
920(398H) CH3 System area   
921(399H) CH3 System area Cooling upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
922(39AH) CH3 System area Cooling control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting A
923(39BH) CH3 System area Cooling method setting 0 Setting 
924(39CH) CH3 System area Overlap/dead band setting 0 Setting 
925 to 930  System area   
(39DH to 3A2H)
931(3A3H) CH3 Alert dead band setting 10 Setting 
932(3A4H) CH3 Number of alert delay 0 Setting 
*2
933(3A5H) CH3 Alert 1 mode setting 0 Setting 
934(3A6H) CH3 Alert 2 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
935(3A7H) CH3 Alert 3 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
936(3A8H) CH3 Alert 4 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
937(3A9H) CH3 Loop disconnection detection System area 480 Setting 
judgment time
938(3AAH) CH3 Loop disconnection detection System area 0 Setting 
dead band
939 to 945  System area   
(3ABH to 3B1H)
946(3B2H) CH3 AT bias 0 Setting 
947(3B3H)  System area   
948(3B4H) CH3 Startup tuning implementation System area 0 Setting 
command
949 to 962  System area   
(3B5H to 3C2H)
963(3C3H) CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting 
964(3C4H)  System area   
965(3C5H) CH3 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting 
966 to 989  System area   
(3C6H to 3DDH)

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 105
 Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
990(3DEH) CH3 Operation mode setting 3 Setting 
991(3DFH) CH3 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit 10000 Setting 
992(3E0H) CH3 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit 0 Setting 
993(3E1H) CH3 External input range upper limit 10000 Setting 
994(3E2H) CH3 External input range lower limit 0 Setting 
995(3E3H) CH3 External output range upper limit 10000 Setting 
996(3E4H) CH3 External output range lower limit 0 Setting 
997(3E5H) CH3 Transistor output functions selection 0 Setting 
998, 999  System area   
(3E6H, 3E7H)
1000(3E8H) CH4 Decimal point position 0 Monitor 
1001(3E9H) CH4 Alert definition 0 Monitor 
1002(3EAH) CH4 Temperature process value (PV) 0 Monitor 
1003(3EBH) CH4 Manipulated value (MV) Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
(MVh)
1004(3ECH) CH4 Temperature rise judgment flag 0 Monitor 
1005(3EDH) CH4 Transistor output flag Heating transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
1006(3EEH) CH4 Set value (SV) monitor 0 Monitor 
1007(3EFH) CH4 Manipulated value (MV) for Manipulated value for heating 0 Monitor 
output with another (external) (MVh) for output with another
analog module (external) analog module
1008(3F0H) CH4 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc)
1009(3F1H) CH4 System area Manipulated value for cooling 0 Monitor 
(MVc) for output with another
(external) analog module
1010(3F2H) CH4 System area Cooling transistor output flag 0 Monitor 
1011 to 1029  System area   
(3F3H to 404H)
1029(405H) CH4 Event 0 Monitor 
1030(406H) CH4 Set value (SV) setting 0 Control 
1031(407H) CH4 Proportional band (P) setting 30 Control 
1032(408H) CH4 Integral time (I) setting 240 Control 
1033(409H) CH4 Differential time (D) setting 60 Control 
1034(40AH) CH4 Alert set value 1 0 Control 
1035(40BH) CH4 Alert set value 2 0 Control 
1036(40CH) CH4 Alert set value 3 0 Control 
1037(40DH) CH4 Alert set value 4 0 Control 
1038(40EH) CH4 Temperature process value (PV) for input with another 0 Control 
(external) analog module
1039(40FH) CH4 System area Cooling proportional band 30 Control 
(Pc) setting
1040 to 1100  System area   
(410H to 44CH)
1101(44DH) CH4 Input range 2 Setting 
1102, 1103  System area   
(44EH, 44FH)
1104(450H) CH4 Control output cycle setting Heating control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting
1105(451H) CH4 Control response parameter 0 Setting 
1106(452H) CH4 Temperature rise completion range setting 10 Setting 
1107(453H) CH4 Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 Setting 
1108(454H) CH4 Upper limit output limiter Heating upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
1109(455H) CH4 Lower limit output limiter System area 0 Setting 

APPX
106 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
1110(456H) CH4 Output change ratio limiter System area 0 Setting 
1111(457H) CH4 Upper limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
1112(458H) CH4 Lower limit setting limiter -100 Setting 
1113(459H) CH4 Setting variation rate limiter 0 Setting 
1114(45AH)  System area   
1115(45BH) CH4 Normal Operation/Reverse System area 1 Setting 
Operation Setting
1116(45CH) CH4 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting 10 Setting 
1117(45DH)  System area   
1118(45EH) CH4 AUTO/MAN mode shift System area 0 Setting 
1119(45FH) CH4 Manual output setting System area -50 Setting 
1120(460H)  System area   
1121(461H) CH4 System area Cooling upper limit output 1000 Setting 
limiter
1122(462H) CH4 System area Cooling control output cycle 300 Setting 
setting
1123(463H) CH4 System area Cooling method setting 0 Setting 
1124(464H) CH4 System area Overlap/dead band setting 0 Setting 
1125 to 1130  System area   
(465H to 46AH)
1131(46BH) CH4 Alert dead band setting 10 Setting 
1132(46CH) CH4 Number of alert delay 0 Setting 
1133(46DH) CH4 Alert 1 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
1134(46EH) CH4 Alert 2 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
1135(46FH) CH4 Alert 3 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
1136(470H) CH4 Alert 4 mode setting*2 0 Setting 
1137(471H) CH4 Loop disconnection detection System area 480 Setting 
A
judgment time
1138(472H) CH4 Loop disconnection detection System area 0 Setting 
dead band
1139 to 1145  System area   
(473H to 479H)
1146(47AH) CH4 AT bias 0 Setting 
1147(47BH)  System area   
1148(47CH) CH4 Startup tuning implementation System area 0 Setting 
command
1149 to 1162  System area   
(47DH to 48AH)
1163(48BH) CH4 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 Setting 
1164(48CH)  System area   
1165(48DH) CH4 Sensor correction value setting 0 Setting 
1166 to 1189  System area   
(48EH to 4A5H)
1190(4A6H) CH4 Operation mode setting 3 Setting 
1191(4A7H) CH4 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit 10000 Setting 
1192(4A8H) CH4 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit 0 Setting 
1193(4A9H) CH4 External input range upper limit 10000 Setting 
1194(4AAH) CH4 External input range lower limit 0 Setting 
1195(4ABH) CH4 External output range upper limit 10000 Setting 
1196(4ACH) CH4 External output range lower limit 0 Setting 
1197(4ADH) CH4 Transistor output functions selection 0 Setting 
1198 to 1999  System area   
(4AEH to 7CFH)

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 107
 Address: CH Setting detail Default value Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID
(hexadecimal) control
2000(7D0H) All Heater disconnection/output off-time current error detection 3 Setting 
delay count
2001(7D1H)  System area   
2002(7D2H) All CT monitor method switching 0 Setting 
2003(7D3H)  System area   
2004(7D4H) CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 Setting 
2005, 2006  System area   
(7D5H, 7D6H)
2007(7D7H) CH2 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 Setting 
2008, 2009  System area   
(7D8H, 7D9H)
2010(7DAH) CH3 Heater disconnection alert System area 0 Setting 
setting
2011, 2012  System area   
(7DBH, 7DCH)
2013(7DDH) CH4 Heater disconnection alert System area 0 Setting 
setting
2014 to 2029  System area   
(7DFH to 7EDH)
2030(7EEH) CT1 Heater current process value 0 Monitor 
2031(7EFH) CT2 Heater current process value 0 Monitor 
2032(7F0H) CT3 Heater current process value 0 Monitor 
2033(7F1H) CT4 Heater current process value 0 Monitor 
2034 to 2061  System area   
(7F2H to 80DH)
2062(80EH) CT1 CT ratio setting 800 Setting 
2063(80FH) CT2 CT ratio setting 800 Setting 
2064(810H) CT3 CT ratio setting 800 Setting 
2065(811H) CT4 CT ratio setting 800 Setting 
2066 to 3599  System area   
(812H to E0FH)
3600 to 3759 All Error history 0 Monitor 
(E10H to EAFH)
3760 to 3919 All Alarm history 0 Monitor 
(EB0H to F4FH)

*1 The firmware version of the FX5-4LC is stored. For Ver. 1.000, 1000 is stored.
*2 Can be changed only in the setting mode.

APPX
108 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
If using FX3 allocation mode
The following table describes the list of buffer memory addresses.

■Un\G0 to Un\G4095
Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
0(0H)  Flag Page 123  Monitor 
1(1H) CH1 Event Page 134  Monitor 
2(2H) CH2
3(3H) CH3
4(4H) CH4
5(5H) CH1 Measurement value (PV) input range span 5%  Monitor 
6(6H) CH2
7(7H) CH3
8(8H) CH4
9(9H) CH1 Manipulated value Manipulated value for -5.0 to +105.0%  Monitor 
(control output value) heating (heating control
10(AH) CH2
(MV) monitor output value) (MV)
11(BH) CH3 monitor
12(CH) CH4
13(DH) CH1 System area Manipulated value for Normally 0  Monitor 
cooling (MV) monitor
14(EH) CH2
15(FH) CH3 0.0 to 105.0%  Monitor 
-5.0 displayed when control is
16(10H) CH4
stopped
17(11H) CH1 Transistor output flag Page 131  Monitor 
18(12H) CH2 (Control output flag)

19(13H) CH3
A
20(14H) CH4
21(15H) CH1 Heater current process value 0.0 to 105.0 A  Monitor 
22(16H) CH2
23(17H) CH3
24(18H) CH4
25(19H) CH1 Temperature process value for input with another -32768 to +32767 0 Control 
26(1AH) CH2 (external) analog module

27(1BH) CH3
28(1CH) CH4
29(1DH) All Control start/stop switching 0: Control stop 0 Control 
1: Control start
30(1EH) All Module information 61C2H 61C2H Monitor 
*1 *1
31(1FH) All Firmware version Monitor 
32(20H) CH1 Manipulated value Manipulated value External output range lower 0 Monitor 
33(21H) CH2 (MV) for output with (MVh) for heating for limit to upper limit
another (external) output with another
34(22H) CH3 analog module monitor (external) analog
35(23H) CH4 module monitor
36(24H) CH1 System area Manipulated value 0 Monitor 
37(25H) CH2 (MVc) for cooling for
output with another
38(26H) CH3 (external) analog
39(27H) CH4 module monitor
40(28H) CH1 Set value (SV) monitor Lower limit setting limiter to 0 Monitor 
41(29H) CH2 upper limit setting limiter

42(2AH) CH3
43(2BH) CH4

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 109
 Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
44(2CH) CH1 Control mode monitor b0 to 2: Control mode 0 Monitor 
b15: Cascade control
45(2DH) CH2
implementation status
46(2EH) CH3
47(2FH) CH4
48(30H) CH1 Set value (SV) setting Within setting limiter range 0 Control 
49(31H) CH1 Alert 1 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
50(32H) CH1 Alert 2 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
51(33H) CH1 Alert 3 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
52(34H) CH1 Alert 4 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
53(35H) CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 to 1000 (0.0 to 100.0 A) (0: 0 Control 
Heater disconnection
detection function OFF)
54(36H) CH1 AUTO/MAN mode System area 0: AUTO 0 Setting 
switching 1: MAN
55(37H) CH1 Manual output settings System area -50 to +1050 -50/0 Setting 
56(38H) CH1 AT (auto tuning) implementation command 0: Stop AT 0 Normal 
1: Implement AT
57(39H) CH1 Operation mode setting 0: Not used 3 Setting 
1: Monitor only
2: Monitor + alert
3: Monitor + alert + control
58(3AH) CH1 Proportional band (P) Heating proportional 0 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
setting band (P) setting span)
Set 0 to use position 2
controls.
59(3BH) CH1 System area Cooling proportional 1 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
band setting span)
60(3CH) CH1 Integral time (I) setting 0 to 3600s 240 Control 
61(3DH) CH1 Differential time (D) setting 0 to 3600s 60 Control 
62(3EH) CH1 Control response parameter 0: Slow 0 Setting 
1: Regular
2: Fast
63(3FH) CH1 System area Overlap/dead band -100 to +100 0 Setting 
64(40H) CH1 Upper limit output Heating upper limit Lower limit output limiter +1 to 1000 Setting 
limiter output limiter 1050/0 to 1050
65(41H) CH1 Lower limit output System area -50 to upper limit output limiter 0 Setting 
limiter -1
66(42H) CH1 System area Cooling upper limit  0 Setting 
output limiter
67(43H) CH1 Output change ratio System area 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
limiter
68(44H) CH1 Sensor correction value setting -5000 to +5000 0 Setting 
69(45H) CH1 Controller sensitivity (dead band) setting 0 to 100 10 Setting 
70(46H) CH1 Control output cycle Heating control output 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0s) 300 Setting 
setting cycle setting
71(47H) CH1 System area Cooling control output 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0s) 0/300 Setting 
cycle setting
72(48H) CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 to 100s (0: Function OFF) 0 Setting 
73(49H) CH1 Setting variation rate limiter 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
74(4AH) CH1 AT bias Input span [, , digit] 0 Setting 
75(4BH) CH1 Normal Operation/ System area 0: Normal Operation 1/0 Setting 
Reverse Operation 1: Reverse Operation
Setting

APPX
110 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
76(4CH) CH1 Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
value +1 to input range upper
limit
77(4DH) CH1 Lower limit setting limiter Input range lower limit to -100 Setting 
Upper limit setting limiter
value -1
78(4EH) CH1 Loop disconnection System area 0 to 7200 s 480/0 Setting 
detection judgment
time
79(4FH) CH1 Loop disconnection System area 0.0 or 0 to input span 0 Setting 
detection dead band
80(50H) CH1 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit -20000 to +20000 10000 Setting 
81(51H) CH1 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled, 20000
max. using span)
82(52H) CH1 External input range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 
83(53H) CH1 External input range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
84(54H) CH1 External output range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 
85(55H) CH1 External output range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
86(56H) CH1 Transistor output functions selection Page 161 0 Setting 
87(57H) CH1 Startup tuning implementation command 0: Disabled 0 Setting 
1: Enabled
88(58H) CH2 Set value (SV) setting Within setting limiter range 0 Control 
89(59H) CH2 Alert 1 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
90(5AH) CH2 Alert 2 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type A
91(5BH) CH2 Alert 3 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
92(5CH) CH2 Alert 4 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
93(5DH) CH2 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 to 1000 (0.0 to 100.0 A) (0: 0 Control 
Heater disconnection
detection function OFF)
94(5EH) CH2 AUTO/MAN mode System area 0: AUTO 0 Setting 
switching 1: MAN
95(5FH) CH2 Manual output settings System area -50 to +1050 -50/0 Setting 
96(60H) CH2 AT (auto tuning) implementation command 0: Stop AT 0 Normal 
1: Implement AT
97(61H) CH2 Operation mode setting 0: Not used 3 Setting 
1: Monitor only
2: Monitor + alert
3: Monitor + alert + control
98(62H) CH2 Proportional band (P) Heating proportional 0 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
setting band (P) setting span)
Set 0 to use position 2
controls.
99(63H) CH2 System area Cooling proportional 1 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
band setting span)
100(64H) CH2 Integral time (I) setting 0 to 3600 s 240 Control 
101(65H) CH2 Differential time (D) setting 0 to 3600 s 60 Control 
102(66H) CH2 Control response parameter 0: Slow 0 Setting 
1: Regular
2: Fast
103(67H) CH2 System area Overlap/dead band -100 to +100 0 Setting 
104(68H) CH2 Upper limit output Heating upper limit Lower limit output limiter +1 to 1000 Setting 
limiter output limiter 1050/0 to 1050

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 111
 Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
105(69H) CH2 Lower limit output System area -50 to upper limit output limiter 0 Setting 
limiter -1
106(6AH) CH2 System area Cooling upper limit  0 Setting 
output limiter
107(6BH) CH2 Output change ratio System area 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
limiter
108(6CH) CH2 Sensor correction value setting -5000 to +5000 0 Setting 
109(6DH) CH2 Controller sensitivity (dead band) setting 0 to 100 10 Setting 
110(6EH) CH2 Control output cycle Heating control output 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0 s) 300 Setting 
setting cycle setting
111(6FH) CH2 System area Cooling control output 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0 s) 0/300 Setting 
cycle setting
112(70H) CH2 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 to 100 s (0: Function OFF) 0 Setting 
113(71H) CH2 Setting variation rate limiter 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
114(72H) CH2 AT bias Input span [, , digit] 0 Setting 
115(73H) CH2 Normal Operation/ System area 0: Normal Operation 1/0 Setting 
Reverse Operation 1: Reverse Operation
Setting
116(74H) CH2 Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
value +1 to input range upper
limit
117(75H) CH2 Lower limit setting limiter Input range lower limit to -100 Setting 
Upper limit setting limiter
value -1
118(76H) CH2 Loop disconnection System area 0 to 7200 s 480/0 Setting 
detection judgment
time
119(77H) CH2 Loop disconnection System area 0.0 or 0 to input span 0 Setting 
detection dead band
120(78H) CH2 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit -20000 to +20000 10000 Setting 
121(79H) CH2 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled, 20000
max. using span)
122(7AH) CH2 External input range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 
123(7BH) CH2 External input range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
124(7CH) CH2 External output range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 
125(7DH) CH2 External output range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
126(7EH) CH2 Transistor output functions selection Page 161 0 Setting 
127(7FH) CH2 Startup tuning implementation command 0: Disabled 0 Setting 
1: Enabled
128(80H) CH3 Set value (SV) setting Within setting limiter range 0 Control 
129(81H) CH3 Alert 1 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
130(82H) CH3 Alert 2 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
131(83H) CH3 Alert 3 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
132(84H) CH3 Alert 4 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
133(85H) CH3 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 to 1000 (0.0 to 100.0 A) (0: 0 Control 
Heater disconnection
detection function OFF)
134(86H) CH3 AUTO/MAN mode System area 0: AUTO 0 Setting 
switching 1: MAN
135(87H) CH3 Manual output settings System area -50 to +1050 -50/0 Setting 

APPX
112 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
136(88H) CH3 AT (auto tuning) implementation command 0: Stop AT 0 Normal 
1: Implement AT
137(89H) CH3 Operation mode setting 0: Not used 3 Setting 
1: Monitor only
2: Monitor + alert
3: Monitor + alert + control
138(8AH) CH3 Proportional band (P) Heating proportional 0 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
setting band (P) setting span)
Set 0 to use position 2
controls.
139(8BH) CH3 System area Cooling proportional 1 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
band setting span)
140(8CH) CH3 Differential time (I) setting 0 to 3600 s 240 Control 
141(8DH) CH3 Differential time (D) setting 0 to 3600 s 60 Control 
142(8EH) CH3 Control response parameter 0: Slow 0 Setting 
1: Regular
2: Fast
143(8FH) CH3 System area Overlap/dead band -100 to +100 0 Setting 
144(90H) CH3 Upper limit output Heating upper limit Lower limit output limiter +1 to 1000 Setting 
limiter output limiter 1050/0 to 1050
145(91H) CH3 Lower limit output System area -50 to upper limit output limiter 0 Setting 
limiter -1
146(92H) CH3 System area Cooling upper limit  0 Setting 
output limiter
147(93H) CH3 Output change ratio System area 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
limiter
148(94H) CH3 Sensor correction value setting -5000 to +5000 0 Setting 
149(95H) CH3 Controller sensitivity (dead band) setting 0 to 100 10 Setting 
150(96H) CH3 Control output cycle
setting
Heating control output
cycle setting
5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0s) 300 Setting  A
151(97H) CH3 System area Cooling control output 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0s) 0/300 Setting 
cycle setting
152(98H) CH3 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 to 100 s (0: Function OFF) 0 Setting 
153(99H) CH3 Setting variation rate limiter 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
154(9AH) CH3 AT bias Input span [, , digit] 0 Setting 
155(9BH) CH3 Normal Operation/ System area 0: Normal Operation 1/0 Setting 
Reverse Operation 1: Reverse Operation
Setting
156(9CH) CH3 Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
value +1 to input range upper
limit
157(9DH) CH3 Lower limit setting limiter Input range lower limit to -100 Setting 
Upper limit setting limiter
value -1
158(9EH) CH3 Loop disconnection System area 0 to 7200 s 480/0 Setting 
detection judgment
time constant
159(9FH) CH3 Loop disconnection System area 0.0 or 0 to input span 0 Setting 
detection dead band
160(A0H) CH3 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit -20000 to +20000 10000 Setting 
161(A1H) CH3 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled, 20000
max. using span)
162(A2H) CH3 External input range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 
163(A3H) CH3 External input range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
164(A4H) CH3 External output range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 113
 Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
165(A5H) CH3 External output range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
166(A6H) CH3 Transistor output functions selection Page 161 0 Setting 
167(A7H) CH3 Startup tuning implementation command 0: Disabled 0 Setting 
1: Enabled
168(A8H) CH4 Set value (SV) setting Within setting limiter range 0 Control 
169(A9H) CH4 Alert 1 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
170(AAH) CH4 Alert 2 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
171(ABH) CH4 Alert 3 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
172(ACH) CH4 Alert 4 set value Depends on alert mode and 0 Control 
input type
173(ADH) CH4 Heater disconnection alert setting 0 to 1000 (0.0 to 100.0 A) (0: 0 Control 
Heater disconnection
detection function OFF)
174(AEH) CH4 AUTO/MAN mode System area 0: AUTO 0 Setting 
switching 1: MAN
175(AFH) CH4 Manual output settings System area -50 to +1050 -50/0 Setting 
176(B0H) CH4 AT (auto tuning) implementation command 0: Stop AT 0 Normal 
1: Implement AT
177(B1H) CH4 Operation mode setting 0: Not used 3 Setting 
1: Monitor only
2: Monitor + alert
3: Monitor + alert + control
178(B2H) CH4 Proportional band (P) Heating proportional 0 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
setting band (P) setting span)
Set 0 to use position 2
controls.
179(B3H) CH4 System area Cooling proportional 1 to 10000 (0.1 to 1000.0% 30 Control 
band setting span)
180(B4H) CH4 Integral time (I) setting 0 to 3600 s 240 Control 
181(B5H) CH4 Differential time (D) setting 0 to 3600 s 60 Control 
182(B6H) CH4 Control response parameter 0: Slow 0 Setting 
1: Regular
2: Fast
183(B7H) CH4 System area Overlap/dead band -100 to +100 0 Setting 
184(B8H) CH4 Upper limit output Heating upper limit Lower limit output limiter +1 to 1000 Setting 
limiter output limiter 1050/0 to 1050
185(B9H) CH4 Lower limit output System area -50 to upper limit output limiter 0 Setting 
limiter -1
186(BAH) CH4 System area Cooling upper limit  0 Setting 
output limiter
187(BBH) CH4 Output change ratio System area 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
limiter
188(BBH) CH4 Sensor correction value setting -5000 to +5000 0 Setting 
189(BCH) CH4 Controller sensitivity (dead band) setting 0 to 100 10 Setting 
190(BEH) CH4 Control output cycle Heating control output 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0s) 300 Setting 
setting cycle setting
191(BFH) CH4 System area Cooling control output 5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0s) 0/300 Setting 
cycle setting
192(C0H) CH4 Primary delay digital filter setting 0 to 100 s (0: Function OFF) 0 Setting 
193(C1H) CH4 Setting variation rate limiter 0 to 1000 0 Setting 
194(C2H) CH4 AT bias Input span [, , digit] 0 Setting 
195(C3H) CH4 Normal Operation/ System area 0: Normal Operation 1/0 Setting 
Reverse Operation 1: Reverse Operation
Setting

APPX
114 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
196(C4H) CH4 Upper limit setting limiter Lower limit setting limiter 1300 Setting 
value +1 to input range upper
limit
197(C5H) CH4 Lower limit setting limiter Input range lower limit to -100 Setting 
Upper limit setting limiter
value -1
198(C6H) CH4 Loop disconnection System area 0 to 7200 s 480/0 Setting 
detection judgment
time
199(C7H) CH4 Loop disconnection System area 0.0 or 0 to input span 0 Setting 
detection dead band
200(C8H) CH4 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit -20000 to +20000 10000 Setting 
201(C9H) CH4 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled, 20000
max. using span)
202(CAH) CH4 External input range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 
203(CBH) CH4 External input range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
204(CCH) CH4 External output range upper limit -32000 to +32000 10000 Setting 
205(CDH) CH4 External output range lower limit (Upper and lower limit reverse 0 Setting 
operation disabled)
206(CEH) CH4 Transistor output functions selection Page 161 0 Setting 
207(CFH) CH4 Startup tuning implementation command 0: Disabled 0 Setting 
1: Enabled
208(D0H) CH1 Input range Page 140 2 Setting 
209(D1H) CH1 Alert 1 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
210(D2H) CH1 Alert 2 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
211(D3H) CH1 Alert 3 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
212(D4H) CH1 Alert 4 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
A
213(D5H) CH1 System area  0  
214(D6H) CH2 Input range Page 140 2 Setting 
215(D7H) CH2 Alert 1 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
216(D8H) CH2 Alert 2 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
217(D9H) CH2 Alert 3 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
218(DAH) CH2 Alert 4 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
219(DBH) CH2 System area  0  
220(DCH) CH3 Input range Page 140 2 Setting 
221(DDH) CH3 Alert 1 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
222(DEH) CH3 Alert 2 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
223(DFH) CH3 Alert 3 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
224(E0H) CH3 Alert 4 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
225(E1H) CH3 System area  0  
226(E2H) CH4 Input range Page 140 2 Setting 
227(E3H) CH4 Alert 1 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
228(E4H) CH4 Alert 2 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
229(E5H) CH4 Alert 3 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
230(E6H) CH4 Alert 4 mode setting 0 to 14 0 Setting 
231(E7H) CH4 System area    
232(E8H)  System area Cooling method setting 0: Air cooling 0 Setting 
1: Water cooling
2: Cooling gain linear
233(E9H)  Alert dead band setting 0 to 100 10 Setting 
234(EAH)  Number of alert delay 0 to 30000 times 0 Setting 
235(EBH)  Heater disconnection alert/Abnormal current 3 to 255 times 3 Setting 
detection delay count setting during outputs OFF

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 115
 Address: CH Setting detail Monitor/Settings/ Default Data type Backup
Decimal Standard PID Heating/cooling Selection range value
(hexadecimal) control PID control
236(ECH)  Temperature rise completion judgment range 1 to 100 [, , digit] 10 Setting 
237(EDH)  Temperature rise completion soak time setting 0 to 3600 s 0 Setting 
238(EEH)  CT monitor method switching 0: ON current/OFF current 0 Setting 
1: ON current
239(EFH)  CT ratio setting 1 to 9999 800 Setting 
240(F0H) GR1 Control mode switching 0 to 3: Standard PID 0 Setting 
4 to 7: Heating/cooling PID
241(F1H) GR2 Control mode switching
242(F2H) GR1 Standard control SV tracking selection 0: OFF 1 Setting 
1: ON
243(F3H) GR2 Heating-cooling control System area  0
244(F4H) GR1 Standard control Cascade ON/OFF 0: Cascade OFF 0 Setting 
1: Cascade ON
245(F5H) GR2 Heating-cooling control System area  0
246(F6H) GR1 Standard control Cascade gain -10000 to +10000 1000 Setting 
247(F7H) GR2 Heating-cooling control System area  0
248(F8H) GR1 Standard control Cascade bias -1000 to +1000 0 Setting 
249(F9H) GR2 Heating-cooling control System area 
250(FAH) GR1 Standard control Cascade monitor -32000 to +32000 0 Monitor 
251(FBH) GR2 Heating-cooling control System area
252(FCH)  Settings range error address 0: Normal 0 Monitor 
1 or greater: Error address
253(FDH)  Error reset command 0: Error reset OFF 0 Setting 
1: Implement error reset
254(FEH)  Set value backup command 0: Normal 0 Setting 
1: Start backup
255(FFH)  Default setting registration command 0: OFF 0 Setting 
1: All data default
2: Un\G48 to 207, 232, 242 to
255 default
256 to 999  System area    
(100H to 3E7H)
1000(3E8H)  Latest error code  0 Monitor 
1001(3E9H)  Error occurrence address  0 Monitor 
1002(3EAH)  Latest address of error history  0 Monitor 
1003(3EBH)  Latest alarm code  0 Monitor 
1004(3ECH)  Latest address of alarm history  0 Monitor 
1005 to 3599  System area    
(3EDH to E0FH)
3600 to 3759 All Error history  0 Monitor 
(E10H to EAFH)
3760 to 3919 All Alarm history  0 Monitor 
(EB0H to F4FH)
3920 to 4095  System area    
(F50H to FFFH)

*1 The firmware version of the FX5-4LC is stored. For Ver. 1.000, 1000 is stored.

APPX
116 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Details of buffer memory addresses
This section describes the details of buffer memory addresses of the temperature control module.

This section describes the buffer memory for CH1 in normal mode.

Latest error code

The latest error code detected by the temperature control module is stored. For error codes, refer to the following.
Page 92 List of Error Codes

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Latest error code 0
Latest error code (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1000

Error occurrence address (Settings range error address)

The address where an error has occurred is stored.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Error occurrence address 1
Error occurrence address (If using FX3 allocation mode) 252*1, 1001

*1 Un\G252 when using FX3 allocation mode stores only the settings range errors.

Latest address of error history A

Among 'Error history' (Un\G3600 to Un\G3759), the buffer memory address where the latest error code has been stored is
stored.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Latest address of error history 2
Latest address of error history (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1002

Latest alarm code

The latest alarm code detected by the temperature control module is stored. For alarm codes, refer to the following.
Page 94 List of Alarm Codes

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Latest alarm code 3
Latest alarm code (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1003

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 117
 Latest address of alarm history
Among "Alarm history" (Un\G3760 to Un\G3919), the buffer memory address where the latest alarm code has been stored is
stored.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Latest address of alarm history 4
Latest address of alarm history (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1004

Firmware version
The temperature control module firmware version is stored.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Firmware version 31
Firmware version (when using FX3 allocation mode) 31

Control mode selection monitor

Control mode selection or the cascade ON/OFF settings details are stored. The following table lists stored values and the
details.
Normal mode FX3 allocation mode
(1) "Control mode selection" (Un\G300) is stored in bits 1 to 3 for each (1) "Control mode selection" (Un\G240) is stored in bits 1 to 3.
channel. (2) "Cascade ON/OFF" (Un\G244) is stored in bit 16 for each channel.
(2) "Cascade ON/OFF" (Un\G352) is stored in bit 4 for each channel.

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

(2) (1)
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1)

(1) Control mode Control mode Control types Input Output

selection
000 0 Standard PID control Internal Internal
001 1 Standard PID control External Internal
010 2 Standard PID control Internal External
011 3 Standard PID control External External
100 4 Heating/cooling PID control Internal Internal
101 5 Heating/cooling PID control External Internal
110 6 Heating/cooling PID control Internal External
111 7 Heating/cooling PID control External External

(2) Cascade ON/OFF Description

0 Cascade control OFF
1 Cascade control ON

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Control mode selection monitor 37
Control mode selection monitor (If using FX3 allocation mode) 44 45 46 47

APPX
118 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Automatic setting monitor at input range change
The value set in 'Automatic setting at input range change' (Un\G302) is stored.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Automatic setting monitor at input range change 39

Control mode selection

Select the control mode for each control group. The control groups are divided into control group 1 (channels 1 and 2) and
control group 2 (channels 3 and 4), and share common settings within their group.
Normal mode FX3 allocation mode
Set using bits 1 to 3 for each group. Set using bits 1 to 3.

GR2 GR1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (1)
(1) (1)

(1) Set value Control mode Control types Input Output

000 0 Standard PID control Internal Internal
001 1 Standard PID control External Internal
010 2 Standard PID control Internal External
011 3 Standard PID control External External
100 4 Heating/cooling PID control Internal Internal
101 5 Heating/cooling PID control External Internal
110 6 Heating/cooling PID control Internal External
111 7 Heating/cooling PID control External External

• If the inputs are "internal", implement control using the process values detected by the internal inputs of the temperature
A
control module.
• If the inputs are "external", implement control using the value stored in 'CH1 Temperature process value (PV) for input with
another (external) analog module' (Un\G438). Temperature control module internal inputs are not used.
• If the outputs are "internal", implement control using the internal transistor outputs of the temperature control module.
• If the outputs are "external", implement control using the values stored in 'CH1 Manipulated value (MV) for output with
another (external) analog module'/'CH1 Manipulated value for heating (MVh) for output with another (external) analog
module' (Un\G407) and 'CH1 Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) for output with another (external) analog module'
(Un\G409).

• To enable the settings changes in normal mode, it is necessary to write the set values to buffer memory, and
then to turn OFFONOFF again the settings change command (Un\G399, b11).
• Control mode cannot be changed while implementing controls. If changed, the changes will be reflected
when control stops.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
GR1 GR2
Control mode selection 300
Control mode selection (If using FX3 allocation mode) 240 241

■Default value
Set to standard PID control (0).

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 119
 Automatic setting at input range change
When "Channel 1 input range" (Un\G501) is changed, this function automatically changes the relevant buffer memory data to
make sure that an outside settings range error (error code: 1950H) does not occur.
• 0: Disabled
• 1: Enabled
When Enable (1) has been set, the following buffer memory areas are automatically set or initialized when the setting of 'CH1
Input range' (Un\G501) is changed.
Buffer memory name Default value
Standard PID control Heating/cooling PID control
Set value (SV) setting (Un\G430) 0 0
(Heating) proportional band (Un\G431) 30 30
Alerts 1 to 4 settings (Un\G434 to 437) 0 0
(Cooling) proportional band (Un\G439)  30
Upper limit setting limiter (Un\G511) Upper limit value of the input range Upper limit value of the input range
Lower limit setting limiter (Un\G512) Lower limit value of the input range Lower limit value of the input range
Setting change rate limiter (Un\G513) 0 0
Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting 10 10
(Un\G516)
Overlap/dead band (Un\G524)  0
Alert dead band setting (Un\G531) 10 10
Loop disconnection detection dead band 0 0
(Un\G538)
AT bias (Un\G546) 0 0
Sensor compensation set value (Un\G565) 0 0

If changing the input range in normal mode, it is necessary to turn OFFONOFF again the settings change
command (Un\G399, b11).

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Automatic setting at input range change 302

■Default value
Set to disabled (0).

APPX
120 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
SV tracking selection
If turning OFF cascade, this function tracks the slave channel set value in the set values immediately before switching (set
value monitor value).
• 0: SV tracking OFF
• 1: SV tracking ON
If SV tracking is ON If SV tracking is OFF

(1) (1)
(2) (2)

t t
(3) (3)

(1) Slave channel set value (SV) setting

(2) Slave channel set value monitor value
(3) Cascade control ONOFF switching point

It is possible to prevent sudden changes to the slave channel manipulated value when turning OFF cascade.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
A
SV tracking selection 350 351
SV tracking selection (If using FX3 allocation mode) 242 243

■Default value
Set to SV tracking ON (1).

Cascade ON/OFF
Turns ON and OFF cascade during cascade control.
• 0: Cascade OFF
• 1: Cascade ON

During cascade control, auto tuning and startup tuning cannot be implemented.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Cascade ON/OFF 352 353
Cascade ON/OFF (If using FX3 allocation mode) 244 245

■Default value
Set to cascade OFF (0).

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 121
 Cascade gain
During cascade control, gain is set when converting the master channel manipulated value (MV) to the cascade monitor
value.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Cascade gain 354 355
Cascade gain (If using FX3 allocation mode) 246 247

■Setting range
Set to -10000 to +10000 (-10.000 to +10.000).

■Default value
Set to 1000 (1.000).

Cascade bias
Sets the bias amount that is added to the sum of the master channel manipulated value (MV) and cascade gain during
cascade control.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Cascade bias 356 357
Cascade bias (If using FX3 allocation mode) 248 249

■Setting range
Set to -1000 to +1000 (-100.0 to +100.0%).

■Default value
The default value is 0.

Cascade monitor
Stores the master manipulated value (cascade signal) converted using 'cascade gain' and 'cascade bias' that is added to the
slave set value during cascade control.
If 'cascade ON/OFF' is OFF (0), 0 is stored in the cascade monitor.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Cascade monitor 358 359
Cascade monitor (If using FX3 allocation mode) 250 251

APPX
122 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Flag
Stores the temperature control module status in each bit.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Flag 360
Flag (If using FX3 allocation mode) 0

■Flag list
Bit Description Operation
b0 Error status If 0: b1 to 10 are all 0
If any of 1: b1 to 10 is 1
b1 Settings range error status 0: No settings range error
1: Settings range error
b2 24 V DC power supply status 0: 24 V DC power supply normal
1: 24 V DC power supply error
b3 Set value backup error flag 0: Set value backup normal
1: Set value backup error
b4 Channel 1 AT/ST error completion flag 0: No error
1: Error finished
b5 Channel 2 AT/ST error completion flag
b6 Channel 3 AT/ST error completion flag
b7 Channel 4 AT/ST error completion flag
b8 Adjustment data error 0: Adjustment data normal
1: Adjustment data error
b9 Cold contact temperature compensation data error 0: Cold contact temperature compensation normal for all channels
1: Cold contact temperature compensation error detected
b10 A/D converter error 0: A/D converter normal for all channels
1: A/D converter error detected
b11 Not used  A
b12 Control in operation flag 0: Control stopped
1: Control executing
b13 Set value backup flag 0: Set value backup stopped
1: Set value backup in operation
b14 Default completion flag 0: Default incomplete
1: Default complete
b15 Temperature adjustment READY flag*1 0: Temperature control module not READY
1: Temperature control module READY

*1 Once the power supply has been turned ON, the temperature adjustment READY flag turns ON after temperature control module
initialization and auto diagnosis during startup is complete. FROM/TO commands (or direct buffer memory commands) are received
only when the READY flag is ON.

Module information
FX5-4LC individual codes are stored.
• Normal mode: 61C0H
• FX3 allocation mode: 61C2H

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Module information 397
Module information (If using FX3 allocation mode) 30

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 123
 Input signal
The status of the temperature control module can be checked using buffer memory.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Input signal 398
Input signals (If using FX3 allocation mode) 0 to 4

■Input signals list

Buffer memory Description
Input signal Input signals (If using FX3 allocation
mode)
Un\G398, b0 Un\G0, b15 Module READY flag
Un\G398, b1 Un\G0, b12 Setting/operation mode status
Un\G398, b2 Un\G0, b0 Error flag
Un\G398, b3  Hardware error flag
Un\G398, b4 Un\G1, b14 CH1 Auto tuning status
Un\G398, b5 Un\G2, b14 CH2 Auto tuning status
Un\G398, b6 Un\G3, b14 CH3 Auto tuning status
Un\G398, b7 Un\G4, b14 CH4 Auto tuning status
Un\G398, b8  Set value backup completion flag
Un\G398, b9 Un\G0, b14 Default value write completion flag
Un\G398, b10 Un\G0, b3 Set value backup failure flag
Un\G398, b11  Setting change completion flag
Un\G398, b12 Un\G1, b4 to 9 CH1 Alert flag
Un\G398, b13 Un\G2, b4 to 9 CH2 Alert flag
Un\G398, b14 Un\G3, b4 to 9 CH3 Alert flag
Un\G398, b15 Un\G4, b4 to 9 CH4 Alert flag

■Module READY flag (b0)

After the power supply is turned ON, this flag turns ON when the temperature control module is READY. After the power
supply is turned ON, control is not performed for approx. 5 s.

■Setting/operation mode status (b1)

This signal is ON in operation mode and OFF in setting mode.
ON
"Setting/operation mode command" OFF
(Un\G399, b1)
ON
"Setting/operation mode status" OFF
(Un\G398, b1)

Setting mode Operation mode Setting mode

Mode transition at power ON (In operation) (After operation)

Processing mode transition Processing mode transition

Temperature control module will implement

APPX
124 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
■Error flag (b2)
This flag turns ON when an error other than a hardware error occurs.
After an error occurs and the error code of the error is stored in 'Latest error code' (Un\G0), this flag turns ON.
ON
"Error flag"
(Un\G398, b2) OFF

"Latest error code"

0H Error code 0H
(Un\G0)

ON
"Error reset command"
(Un\G399, b2) OFF

Temperature control module will implement

■Hardware error flag (b3)

This flag turns ON when a hardware failure occurs in the temperature control module.

■Auto tuning status (b4 to 7)

This flag turns ON when auto tuning is performed for each channel.
This signal is ON during the auto tuning, and automatically turns OFF at the completion of auto tuning.

■Set value backup completion flag (b8)

Turning OFFON 'Set value backup command' (Un\G399, b8) starts the writing of the data in the buffer memory to the non-
volatile memory.
After the data writing is completed, this flag turns ON. Turning ONOFF 'Set value backup command' (Un\G399, b8) also
turns OFF this flag.
ON
"Set value backup command"
OFF
(Un\G399, b8)

Non-volatile memory write status Before memory write Writing to memory Memory write complete A
ON
"Set value backup completion flag"
OFF
(Un\G398, b8)

Implemented by the program

Temperature control module will implement

■Default value write completion flag (b9)

Turning OFFON 'Default setting registration command' (Un\G399, b9) starts the writing of the default value of the
temperature control module to the buffer memory.
After the default value writing is completed, this flag turns ON.

■Set value backup failure flag (b10)

Turning OFFON 'Set value backup command' (Un\G399, b8) writes the data in the buffer memory to the non-volatile
memory. This flag turns ON when the writing to the non-volatile memory has failed.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 125
 ■Setting change completion flag (b11)
Turning OFFON 'Setting change command' (Un\G399, b11) updates the value set in each buffer memory area in the
controls. After the data is reflected, this flag turns ON. Turning ONOFF 'Setting change command' (Un\G399, b11) also
turns OFF this flag.
ON
"Setting change command" OFF
(Un\G399, b11)
ON
"Setting change completion flag" OFF
(Un\G398, b11)

Performed by the program

Temperature control module will perform

■Alert flag (b12 to 15)

When an alert has occurred in CH1 to 4, the alert definition is stored in 'CH1 to 4 Alert definition' (Un\G401, 601, 801, 1001),
and this flag turns ON.

Output signal
Sets the control commands from the temperature control module in buffer memory.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Output signal 399
Output signals (If using FX3 allocation mode) 29, 56, 96, 136, 176, 253 to 255

■Output signals list

Buffer memory Description
Output signal Output signals (If using FX3 allocation
mode)
Un\G399, b0  System area
Un\G399, b1 Un\G29 Setting/operation mode command
Un\G399, b2 Un\G253 Error reset command
Un\G399, b3  System area
Un\G399, b4 Un\G56 CH1 Auto tuning command
Un\G399, b5 Un\G96 CH2 Auto tuning command
Un\G399, b6 Un\G136 CH3 Auto tuning command
Un\G399, b7 Un\G176 CH4 Auto tuning command
Un\G399, b8 Un\G254 Set value backup command
Un\G399, b9 Un\G255 Default setting registration command
Un\G399, b10  System area
Un\G399, b11  Setting change command
Un\G399, b12  System area
Un\G399, b13  System area
Un\G399, b14  System area
Un\G399, b15  System area

■Setting/operation mode command (b1)

Use this signal to select the setting mode or the operation mode.
• 0: Setting mode
• 1: Operation mode

APPX
126 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
■Error reset command (b2)
Turning OFFON the error reset command resets the following information.
• Latest error code
• Error occurrence address (Settings range error address)
• Latest alarm code
• Input signals error occurrence flag (Un\G398, b2)
• Flags error flag (Un\G360, b0 to 10)

■Auto tuning command (b4 to 7)

Use this signal to start the auto tuning for each channel. Turning OFFON 'CH1 Auto tuning command' (Un\G399, b4) starts
the auto tuning and turns OFFON 'CH1 Auto tuning status' (Un\G398, b4). After the auto tuning is completed, 'CH1 Auto
tuning status' (Un\G398, b4) turns ONOFF.
After auto tuning is completed, turn ONOFF 'CH1 Auto tuning command' (Un\G399, b4) .

■Set value backup command (b8)

Use this signal to write the data in the buffer memory to the non-volatile memory. Turning OFFON this command starts the
data writing to the non-volatile memory.
For the buffer memory areas whose data is to be backed up, refer to the following.
Page 99 List of buffer memory addresses
After backup is complete, store 0 in 'Set value backup command' (Un\G399, b8).

Precautions
• If a settings error occurs, backup cannot be implemented.
• Do not change the buffer memory during backup.

■Default setting registration command (b9)

• Normal mode
Turning OFFON 'Default setting registration command' (Un\G399, b9) returns the data in the buffer memory to the default
values according to the control mode settings. After the data writing is completed, 'Default value write completion flag' A
(Un\G398, b9) turns ON.
Turning ONOFF the 'Default setting registration command' (Un\G399, b9) also turns OFF the 'Default value write
completion flag' (Un\G398, b9).
• FX3 allocation mode
Writing 1 to the 'Default setting registration command' (Un\G255) restores all data in the buffer memory to the default values
according to the settings. Writing 2 restores Un\G48 to 207, 232, and 242 to 255 to the default values according to the
settings. When writing is complete, the 'Default setting registration command' (Un\G255) becomes 0.
When the 'Default setting registration command' (Un\G255) becomes 0, the 'default value write completion flag' (Un\G0, b14)
turns ON for approx. 250 ms.

■Setting change command (b11)

Use this command to enable the set value in following buffer memory.
• Input range (Un\G501)
• Alerts 1 to 4 mode settings (Un\G533 to 536)
• Control mode selection (Un\G300)
• Transistor output functions selection (Un\G597)
Even though the set values are written into the buffer memory, they are not immediately reflected to the temperature control
module's operation.
To validate the set values, turn OFFONOFF this command after the set values are written into the buffer memory.
Turning OFFONOFF this command operates the temperature control module according to the setting in each buffer
memory area.

• This device can be used as an interlock of 'Setting/operation mode command' (Un\G399, b1).
• Turn OFFON the settings change command while control is stopped.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 127
 CH1 Decimal point position
Depending on the setting of 'CH1 Input range' (Un\G501), the decimal point position applicable in the following buffer memory
areas is stored in this area.
• 'CH1 Temperature process value (PV)' (Un\G402)
• 'CH1 Set value (SV) setting' (Un\G430)
• 'CH1 Proportional band (P) setting' (Un\G431)
• 'CH1 Alert set value 1 to 4'(Un\G434 to 437)
• 'CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting' (Un\G439)
• 'CH1 Upper limit setting limiter' (Un\G511)
• 'CH1 Lower limit setting limiter' (Un\G512)
• 'CH1 Setting change rate limiter' (Un\G513)
• 'CH1 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting' (Un\G516)
• 'CH1 Overlap/dead band setting' (Un\G524)
• 'CH1 Alert dead band setting' (Un\G531)
• 'CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band' (Un\G538)
• 'CH1 AT bias' (Un\G546)
• 'CH1 Sensor correction value setting' (Un\G565)
Stored values depend on the setting in 'CH1 Input range' (Un\G501).
'CH1 Input range' (Un\G501) Stored value Setting details
When the resolution is 1 0 No decimal point
When the resolution is 0.1 1 First decimal place

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Decimal point position 400 600 800 1000
CH Decimal point position (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1 (b12)*1 2 (b12)*1 3 (b12)*1 4 (b12)*1

*1 For details, refer to Page 134 CH1 Event.

CH1 Alert definition

Bits corresponding to alerts detected turn ON.
Bit No. Flag name Alert definition
b0 CH1 Input range upper limit When the temperature process value (PV) has exceeded the temperature measuring
range of the set input range.
b1 CH1 Input range lower limit When the temperature process value (PV) is below the temperature measuring range
of the set input range.
b2 to b7  
b8 CH1 alert 1 When Alert 1 has occurred. (Page 53 Alert Function)
b9 CH1 alert 2 When Alert 2 has occurred. (Page 53 Alert Function)
b10 CH1 alert 3 When Alert 3 has occurred. (Page 53 Alert Function)
b11 CH1 alert 4 When Alert 4 has occurred. (Page 53 Alert Function)
b12 CH1 Heater disconnection When a heater disconnection has been detected. (Page 62 Heater Disconnection
detection Detection Function)
b13 CH1 Loop disconnection When a loop disconnection has been detected. (Page 60 Loop Disconnection
detection Detection Function)
b14 CH1 Output off-time current error When an output off-time current error has been detected. (Page 62 Output OFF-
time Current Error Detection Function)
b15  

APPX
128 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
■Buffer memory address
The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert definition 401 601 801 1001
CH Alert definition (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1*1 2*1 3*1 4*1

*1 For details, refer to Page 134 CH1 Event.

CH1 Temperature process value (PV)

The values that implemented the following processes are stored in the detected temperature values.
• Linearize process*1
• Sensor process
• Primary Delay Digital Filter
*1 Not implemented when using external (other analog module) inputs.
The value to be stored differs depending on the value stored in 'CH1 Decimal point position' (Un\G400). (Page 128 CH1
Decimal point position)
• If there is nothing after the decimal point (0): Stored as is.
• If there is 1 digit after the decimal point (1): The 10 value is stored.

One of the following values is stored depending on the input type.

• Internal temperature inputs: Input range lower limit-5% of span to input range upper limit+5% of span
• Internal low-voltage inputs: Scaling lower limit-5% of span to scaling upper limit+5% of span
• External inputs: External input range lower limit-5% of span to external input range upper limit+5% of span

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Temperature process value (PV) 402 602 802 1002
A
CH Temperature process value (PV) (If using FX3 allocation mode) 5 6 7 8

CH1 Manipulated value (MV)

The manipulated value is stored either as a result of PID calculations or during MAN mode.
Range of values to be stored during control Value to be stored while the control has stopped
Lower limit output limiter value to upper limit output limiter value -50 (-5.0%)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Manipulated value (MV) 403 603 803 1003
CH Manipulated value (MV) (If using FX3 allocation mode) 9 10 11 12

CH1 Manipulated value for heating (MVh)

Stores the manipulated value for heating of the results of the heating/cooling PID calculation.
Range of values to be stored during control Value to be stored while the control has stopped
0 to heating upper limit output limiter value -50 (-5.0%)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Manipulated value for heating (MVh) 403 603 803 1003
CH Manipulated value for heating (MVh) (If using FX3 allocation mode) 9 10 11 12

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 129
 CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag
This flag is for checking whether or not the temperature process value (PV) is within the temperature rise completion range.
One of the following values is stored in this area.
• OFF: Outside the temperature rise completion range
• ON: Within the temperature rise completion range
When the temperature process value (PV) stays within the temperature rise completion range during the set temperature rise
completion soak time, Within temperature rise completion range (ON) is stored in this buffer memory area.

Temperature process value (PV)

Temperature rise (1)

completion range
Set
value
(SV)

Time

(2)

(1) At this time, 'CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag' (Un\G404) is set to Within temperature rise completion range (ON).
(2) 'CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting' (Un\G507)

Set the temperature rise completion range and the temperature rise completion soak time in the following buffer memory
areas.
• 'CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting' (Un\G506) (Page 143 CH1 Temperature rise completion range
setting)
• 'CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting' (Un\G507) (Page 144 CH1 Temperature rise completion soak
time setting)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Temperature rise judgment flag 404 604 804 1004
CH Temperature rise judgment flag (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1 (b15)*1 2 (b15)*1 3 (b15)*1 4 (b15)*1

*1 For details, refer to Page 134 CH1 Event.

APPX
130 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Transistor output flag (Control output flag)
Stores the ON/OFF status of the transistor outputs.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

b1 to 15 fixed at 0 Transistor output flag

Control mode selection Transistor output functions selection Transistor output flag contents (b0)
(Un\G300) (Un\G597)
0 to 1  Transistor output status
2 to 3 0 Time proportional calculation results
1 to 2 Transistor output status
3 to 7 Time proportional calculation results

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Transistor output flag 405 605 805 1005
CH Transistor output flag (If using FX3 allocation mode) 17 18 19 20

CH1 Heating transistor output flag

Stores the ON/OFF status of the transistor outputs.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

b9 to 15 fixed at 0 b1 to 7 fixed at 0
Heating transistor output flag
Control mode Transistor output Channel Heating transistor output flag contents
selection (Un\G300) functions selection b8*1 b0
(Un\G597)
4 to 5  1, 3 Cooling transistor output status Heating transistor output status A
 2, 4 Cooling output time proportional Heating output time proportional
calculation results calculation results
6 to 7 0  Cooling output time proportional Heating output time proportional
calculation results calculation results
1  Cooling output time proportional Heating transistor output status
calculation results
2  Cooling transistor output status Heating output time proportional
calculation results
3 to 7  Cooling output time proportional Heating output time proportional
calculation results calculation results

*1 b8 is used only in FX3 allocation mode. Normal mode refer to CH1 Cooling transistor output flag.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Heating transistor output flag 405 605 805 1005
CH Heating transistor output flag (If using FX3 allocation mode) 17 18 19 20

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 131
 CH1 Set value (SV) monitor
Stores the set values used by PID control and alert functions.
It is possible to monitor excessive changes to the slave set values during "Setting change rate limiter" settings and cascade
control.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Set value (SV) monitor 406 606 806 1006
CH Set value (SV) monitor (If using FX3 allocation mode) 40 41 42 43

CH1 Manipulated value (MV) for output with another (external) analog module
Scales and stores the values stored in the following buffer memory after output limiting process in the external outputs range
when implementing control using external outputs.
Buffer memory name Buffer memory address Reference
CH1 Manipulated value (MV) 403 Page 129 CH1 Manipulated value (MV)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Manipulated value (MV) for output with another (external) analog module 407 607 807 1007
CH Manipulated value (MV) for output with another (external) analog module 32 33 34 35
(If using FX3 allocation mode)

CH1 Manipulated value for heating (MVh) for output with another (external) analog
module
Scales and stores the values stored in the following buffer memory after output limiting process in the external outputs range
when implementing control using external outputs.
Buffer memory name Buffer memory address Reference
CH1 Manipulated value for heating (MVh) 403 Page 129 CH1 Manipulated value for heating
(MVh)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Manipulated value for heating (MVh) for output with another (external) 407 607 807 1007
analog module
CH Manipulated value for heating (MVh) for output with another (external) 32 33 34 35
analog module (If using FX3 allocation mode)

APPX
132 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Manipulated value for cooling (MVc)
Stores the manipulated value for cooling of the results of the heating/cooling PID calculation.
Range of values to be stored during control Value to be stored while the control has stopped
0 to cooling upper limit output limiter value -50(-5.0%)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) 408 608 808 1008
CH Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) (If using FX3 allocation mode) 13 14 15 16

CH1 Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) for output with another (external) analog
module
Scales and stores the values stored in the following buffer memory after output limiting process in the external outputs range
when implementing control using external outputs.
Buffer memory name Buffer memory address Reference
CH1 Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) 408 Page 133 CH1 Manipulated value for cooling
(MVc)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) for output with another (external) 409 609 809 1009
analog module
CH Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) for output with another (external) 36 37 38 39
analog module (If using FX3 allocation mode)

A
CH1 Cooling transistor output flag
Stores the ON/OFF status of the transistor outputs.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

b1 to 15 fixed at 0
Cooling transistor output flag
Control mode Transistor output Channel Transistor output flag contents (b0)
selection (Un\G300) functions selection
(Un\G597)
4 to 5  1, 3 Cooling transistor output status
 2, 4 Cooling output time proportional calculation results
6 to 7 0  Cooling output time proportional calculation results
1  Cooling output time proportional calculation results
2  Cooling transistor output status
3 to 7  Cooling output time proportional calculation results

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Cooling transistor output flag*1 410 610 810 1010

*1 If using FX3 allocation mode, refer to CH1 Heating transistor output flag.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 133
 CH1 Event
Stores the channel statuses in each bit.
Bit No. Description Operation
b0 Input error (upper limit) status OFF: No input error (upper limit)
ON: Input error (upper limit) detected
b1 Input error (lower limit) status OFF: No input error (lower limit)
ON: Input error (lower limit) detected
b2 Cold contact temperature compensation OFF: Cold contact temperature compensation normal
status ON: Cold contact temperature compensation error detected
b3 A/D converter status OFF: A/D converter normal
ON: A/D converter error detected
b4 Alert 1 status OFF: Alert 1 normal
ON: Alert 1 occurred
b5 Alert 2 status OFF: Alert 2 normal
ON: Alert 2 occurred
b6 Alert 3 status OFF: Alert 3 normal
ON: Alert 3 occurred
b7 Alert 4 status OFF: Alert 4 normal
ON: Alert 4 occurred
b8 Loop disconnection alert status OFF: Loop disconnection alert normal
ON: Loop disconnection alert occurred
b9 Heater disconnection alert status OFF: Heater disconnection alert normal
ON: Heater disconnection alert occurred
b10 Current error status while outputs are OFF OFF: Current error while outputs are OFF not detected
ON: Current error while outputs are OFF occurred
b11 ST implementation status OFF: ST stopped
ON: ST implementing
b12 Decimal point position OFF: 1/or digit
ON: 0.1/
b13 Manual mode shift completion flag OFF: No AUTO mode or MAN mode shift
ON: MAN mode shift complete
b14 AT implementation status OFF: AT stopped
ON: AT implementing
b15 Temperature rise completion status OFF: Temperature rise incomplete
ON: Temperature rise complete

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Event 429 629 829 1029
Event (If using FX3 allocation mode) 1 2 3 4

APPX
134 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Set value (SV) setting
Sets the PID control and alert process set values.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Set value (SV) setting 430 630 830 1030
CH Set value (SV) setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 48 88 128 168

■Setting range
The range is determined by the values set in 'CH1 Upper limit setting limiter' (Un\G511) and 'CH1 Lower limit setting limiter'
(Un\G512). (Page 147 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter, Page 147 CH1 Lower limit setting limiter)
When a value out of the setting range is set in this area, an out of setting range error (error code: 1950H) occurs, and the
status is as described below.
• 'Error flag' (Un\G398, b2) turns ON.
• An error code is stored in 'Latest error code' (Un\G0).

■Setting unit
The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in 'CH1 Decimal point position' (Un\G400). (Page 128 CH1
Decimal point position)
• No decimal point (0): Set a value in increments of 1 ( or digit).
• If there is 1 digit (1) past the decimal point: Set a value (the value multiplied by 10) in increments of 0.1 ().

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Proportional band (P) setting

Set the proportional band (P) to execute the standard PID control.
A
■Buffer memory address
The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Proportional band (P) setting 431 631 831 1031
CH Proportional band (P) setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 58 98 138 178

■Setting range
0 to 10000 (span*1 0.0 to 1000.0%)
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Two-position control
Set the proportional band (P) to 0.
For details on the two-position control, refer to the following.
Page 25 Control Method

■Default value
The default value is 30 (3.0%).

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 135
 CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting
Set the heating proportional band (Ph) to implement the heating and cooling PID control.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Heating proportional band (Ph) setting 431 631 831 1031
CH Heating proportional band (Ph) setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 58 98 138 178

■Setting range
0 to 10000 (span*1 0.0 to 1000.0%)
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Two-position control
Set the heating proportional band (Ph) to 0.
For details on the two-position control, refer to the following.
Page 25 Control Method

■Default value
The default value is 30 (3.0%).

CH1 Integral time (I) setting

Set the integral time (I) to execute the PID control.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Integral time (I) setting 432 632 832 1032
CH Integral time (I) setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 60 100 140 180

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 3600 (0 to 3600s).

■P control or PD control
Set 0. For details on control methods, refer to the following.
Page 25 Control Method

■Default value
The default value is 240 (240s).

APPX
136 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Derivative time (D) setting
Set the derivative time (D) to execute the PID control.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Differential time (D) setting 433 633 833 1033
CH Differential time (D) setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 61 101 141 181

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 3600 (0 to 3600s).

■P control or PI control
Set 0. For details on control methods, refer to the following.
Page 25 Control Method

■Default value
The default value is 60 (60s).

CH1 Alert set value 1

Set the temperature to turn ON CH1 alert 1 (Un\G401, b8) according to the selected alert 1 'alert mode' (Un\G533).
For 'CH1 Warning Occurrence Contents' (Un\G401), refer to the following.
Page 128 CH1 Alert definition
For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
A
CH Alert set value 1 434 634 834 1034
CH Alert set value 1 (If using FX3 allocation mode) 49 89 129 169

■Alert mode
Set the alert mode of Alert 1 in the following buffer memory area. The alert mode of Alert 1 corresponds to 'CH1 Alert set
value 1' (Un\G434).
• 'CH1 Alert 1 mode setting' (Un\G533)

■Setting range
The write set value units and settings range depend on the alert mode that has been set.
Alert mode Setting range of alert set value Remarks
No alert 0 
Upper limit input alert, lower limit input alert Same as the input range.*1 Same as with wait.
Upper limit deviation alert, lower limit deviation - span to + span *2 Same as with wait and re-wait.
alert
Upper/lower limit deviation alert, within range alert 0 to + span*2 Same as with wait and re-wait.

*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling range. During external inputs, external input
range.
*2 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 137
 ■Setting unit
The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in 'CH1 Decimal point position' (Un\G400). (Page 128 CH1
Decimal point position)
• No decimal point (0): Set a value in increments of 1 ( or digit).
• If there is 1 digit (1) past the decimal point: Set a value (the value multiplied by 10) in increments of 0.1 ().

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Alert set value 2

Set the temperature to turn ON CH1 alert 2 (Un\G401, b9) according to the selected alert 2 'alert mode' (Un\G533).
For 'CH1 Warning Occurrence Contents' (Un\G401), refer to the following.
Page 128 CH1 Alert definition
For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert set value 2 435 635 835 1035
CH Alert set value 2 (If using FX3 allocation mode) 50 90 130 170

■Alert mode
Set the alert mode of Alert 2 in the following buffer memory area. The alert mode of Alert 2 corresponds to 'CH1 Alert set
value 2' (Un\G435).
• 'CH1 Alert 2 mode setting' (Un\G534)

■Setting range
For the settings range, refer to the following.
Page 137 Setting range

■Setting unit
For the settings unit, refer to the following.
Page 138 Setting unit

■Default value
The default value is 0.

APPX
138 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Alert set value 3
Set the temperature to turn ON CH1 alert 3 (Un\G401, b10) according to the selected alert 3 'alert mode' (Un\G533).
For 'CH1 Warning Occurrence Contents' (Un\G401), refer to the following.
Page 128 CH1 Alert definition
For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert set value 3 436 636 836 1036
CH Alert set value 3 (If using FX3 allocation mode) 51 91 131 171

■Alert mode
Set the alert mode of Alert 3 in the following buffer memory area. The alert mode of Alert 3 corresponds to 'CH1 Alert set
value 3' (Un\G436).
• 'CH1 Alert 3 mode setting' (Un\G535)

■Setting range
For the settings range, refer to the following.
Page 137 Setting range

■Setting unit
For the settings unit, refer to the following.
Page 138 Setting unit

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Alert set value 4 A

Set the temperature to turn ON CH1 alert 4 (Un\G401, b11) according to the selected alert 4 'alert mode' (Un\G533).
For 'CH1 Warning Occurrence Contents' (Un\G401), refer to the following.
Page 128 CH1 Alert definition
For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert set value 4 437 637 837 1037
CH Alert set value 4 (If using FX3 allocation mode) 52 92 132 172

■Alert mode
Set the alert mode of Alert 4 in the following buffer memory area. The alert mode of alert 4 corresponds to 'CH1 alert set value
4' (Un\G437).
• 'CH1 Alert 4 mode setting' (Un\G536)

■Setting range
For the settings range, refer to the following.
Page 137 Setting range

■Setting unit
For the setting unit, refer to the following.
Page 138 Setting unit

■Default value
The default value is 0.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 139
 CH1 Temperature process value (PV) for input with another (external) analog module
The digital input value of the current or voltage converted in another analog module on the system can be used as a
temperature process value (PV). Store the digital input value of the current or voltage converted by another analog module in
this area. For details, refer to the following.
Page 49 Input

Precautions
• If a greater value than (external input range upper limit +5% of external input range) is set, an input upper limit alert occurs,
and 'CH1 event' (Un\G429) b0 turns ON.
• If a smaller value than (external input range lower limit -5% of external input range) is set, an input lower limit alert occurs,
and 'CH1 event' (Un\G429) b1 turns ON.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Temperature process value (PV) for input with another (external) analog 438 638 838 1038
module
CH Temperature process value (PV) for input with another (external) analog 25 26 27 28
module (If using FX3 allocation mode)

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting

Set the cooling proportional band (Pc) to implement the heating and cooling PID control.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting 439 639 839 1039
CH Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 59 99 139 179

■Setting range
1 to 10000 (span*1 0.1 to 1000.0%)
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Default value
The default value is 30 (3.0%).

CH1 Input range

Select the input type used by the temperature control module.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Input range 501 701 901 1101
CH input range (If using FX3 allocation mode) 208 214 220 226

APPX
140 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
■Setting value and type of thermocouple
The following table lists the set values of 'CH1 Input range' (Un\G501) and the corresponding temperature sensor types.
Setting value Temperature sensor type Temperature measuring range Resolution Unit
0 K -200.0 to +200.0 0.1 
1 -100.0 to +400.0 0.1 
2 -100 to +1300 1 
3 -100 to +800 1 
4 -100 to +2400 1 
5 J -200.0 to +200.0 0.1 
6 -100.0 to +400.0 0.1 
7 -100.0 to +800.0 0.1 
8 -100 to +1200 1 
9 -100 to +1600 1 
10 -100 to +2100 1 
11 R 0 to 1700 1 
12 0 to 3200 1 
13 S 0 to 1700 1 
14 0 to 3200 1 
15 E -200.0 to +200.0 0.1 
16 0 to 1000 1 
17 0 to 1800 1 
18 T -200.0 to +200.0 0.1 
19 -200.0 to +400.0 0.1 
20 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 
21 -300.0 to +400.0 0.1 
22 -300.0 to +700.0 0.1 
23 0.0 to 700.0 0.1 
24 B 0 to 1800 1  A
25 0 to 3000 1 
26 N 0 to 1300 1 
27 0 to 2300 1 
28 PL  0 to 1200 1 
29 0 to 2300 1 
30 W5Re/W26Re 0 to 2300 1 
31 0 to 3000 1 
32 U -200.0 to +600.0 0.1 
33 -300.0 to +700.0 0.1 
34 L 0.0 to 900.0 0.1 
35 0 to 1600 1 
36 Jpt100 -50.0 to +150.0 0.1 
37 -200.0 to +500.0 0.1 
38 -300.0 to +300.0 0.1 
39 300 to 900 1 
40 Pt100 -50.0 to +150.0 0.1 
41 -200.0 to +600.0 0.1 
42 -300.0 to +300.0 0.1 
43 -300 to +1100 1 
44 Pt1000 -200.0 to +650.0 0.1 
45 -328 to +1184 1 
46 Low voltage 0 to 10 1 mV
47 0 to 100 1 mV

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 141
 ■Enabling the settings
If changing the settings, turn OFFONOFF the 'Settings change command' (Un\G399, b11) in normal mode to enable the
settings contents.

Precautions
Settings cannot be changed while implementing controls. If changed during control implementation, the settings contents will
be reflected when control stops.

■Default value
The default value is 2.

CH1 Control output cycle setting

Sets the control output cycle (time proportional cycle).
Manipulated value (MV) ON time and OFF time are each as described below.
• ON time: Control output cycle (s)  manipulated value (%)
• OFF time: Control output cycle (s)  (100 - manipulated value (%))

Ex.
If control output cycle: 30 s/manipulated value (MV): 60%
18s 12s

ON
Manipulated value (MV)
OFF

Control output cycle

30s
■Buffer memory address
The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Control output cycle setting 504 704 904 1104
CH Control output cycle setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 70 110 150 190

■Setting range
5 to 1000 (0.5 to 100.0s)

■Default value
300 (30.0s)

CH1 Heating control output cycle setting

Sets the heating control output cycle (time proportional cycle).
Manipulated value for heating (MVh) ON time and OFF time are each as described below.
• ON time: Heating control output cycle (s)  manipulated value for heating (%)
• OFF time: Heating control output cycle (s)  (100 - manipulated value for heating (%))
For details, refer to Page 142 CH1 Control output cycle setting.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Heating control output cycle setting 504 704 904 1104
CH Heating control output cycle setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 70 110 150 190

APPX
142 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Control response parameter
In the simple two-degree-of-freedom PID control, select the response speed to the change of the set value (SV) from the
following three levels:
Slow, Normal, and Fast.
Page 31 Simple Two-degree-of-freedom

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Control response parameter 505 705 905 1105
CH Control response parameter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 62 102 142 182

■Setting range
Setting Setting Description
value detail
0 Slow Set this value when reducing the overshoot and undershoot to the change of the set value (SV). However, the settling time
becomes the longest among the three settings.
1 Normal This setting has features between Slow and Fast.
2 Fast Set this value when hastening the response to the change of the set value (SV). However, the overshoot and undershoot
become the largest among the three settings.

Temperature process value (PV) Fast

Normal

Set value
(SV) 2

Change
Slow
A
Set value
(SV) 1

Time
Set value (SV) change point

■Default value
The default value is Slow (0).

CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting

Set the width of the temperature rise completion range. When the temperature process value (PV) satisfies the following
conditions, the temperature rise is completed.
• Set value (SV) - Temperature rise completion range  Temperature process value (PV)  Set value (SV) + Temperature rise
completion range

Temperature rise
completion range (+)
Setting value
Temperature rise
Set value (SV)
judgment range
Temperature rise
completion range (-)

When the value set in 'CH1 Temperature process value (PV)' (Un\G402) is within the temperature rise judgment range, 'CH1
Temperature rise judgment flag' (Un\G404) is set to Within temperature rise completion range (ON). (For the time taken for
'CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag' (Un\G404) to set to Within temperature rise completion range (ON) after the
temperature rise completion, set the time in 'CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting' (Un\G507).)

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 143
 ■Buffer memory address
The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Temperature rise completion range setting 506 706 906 1106
Temperature rise completion range setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 236

■Setting range
1 to 100 (/ or digit)

■Default value
The default value is 10.

CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting

Set the time taken to set 'CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag' (Un\G404) to Within temperature rise completion range (ON)
after the completion of the temperature rise.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Temperature rise completion soak time setting 507 707 907 1107
Temperature rise completion soak time setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 237

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 3600 (s).

■Default value
The default value is 0 (s).

CH1 Upper limit output limiter

Set the upper limit value for actually outputting the manipulated value (MV) calculated by the standard PID operation to an
external device.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Upper limit output limiter 508 708 908 1108
CH Upper limit output limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 64 104 144 184

■Setting range
The lower limit output limiter +1 to 1050 (105.0% max.).
Set values so that the lower limit output limiter value is smaller than the upper limit output limiter value.
When the lower limit output limiter value is equal to or greater than the upper limit output limiter value, CH Upper/lower limit
output limiter setting error (error code: 1A0H) occurs.
When a value out of the setting value is set, an out of setting range error (error code: 1950H) occurs. When an error has
occurred, the following operations will be executed.
• 'Error flag' (Un\G398, b2) turns ON.
• An error code is stored in 'Latest error code' (Un\G0).

■Two-position control
In the two-position control, this setting is disabled.

■Default value
The default value is 1000 (100.0%).

APPX
144 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Heating upper limit output limiter
Set the upper limit value for actually outputting the manipulated value for heating (MVh) calculated by the heating and cooling
PID operation to an external device. In the auto tuning, this setting is ignored.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Heating upper limit output limiter 508 708 908 1108
CH Heating upper limit output limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 42 74 106 138

■Setting range
This is 0 to 1050 (0.0 to 105.0%).
When a value out of the setting value is set, an out of setting range error (error code: 1950H) occurs. When an error has
occurred, the following operations will be executed.
• 'Error flag' (Un\G398, b2) turns ON.
• An error code is stored in 'Latest error code' (Un\G0).

In the heating-cooling PID control, the lower limit value is not used. When 'CH1 Lower limit output limiter'
(Un\G509) is set to a value other than 0, an out of setting range error (error code: 1950H) occurs.

■Two-position control
In the two-position control, this setting is disabled.

■Default value
The default value is 1000 (100.0%).

CH1 Lower limit output limiter

Set the lower limit value for actually outputting the manipulated value (MV) calculated by the PID operation to an external A
device.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Lower limit output limiter 509 709 909 1109
CH Lower limit output limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 65 105 145 185

■Setting range
-50 to upper limit output limiter -1 (-5.0% min.)
Set values so that the lower limit output limiter value is smaller than the upper limit output limiter value.
When the lower limit output limiter value is equal to or greater than the upper limit output limiter value, CH Upper/lower limit
output limiter setting error (error code: 1A0H) occurs.
When a value out of the setting value is set, an out of setting range error (error code: 1950H) occurs. When an error has
occurred, the following operations will be executed.
• 'Error flag' (Un\G398, b2) turns ON.
• An error code is stored in 'Latest error code' (Un\G0).

■Two-position control
In the two-position control, this setting is disabled.

■Default value
The default value is 0 (0.0%).

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 145
 CH1 Output change ratio limiter
Set the limit of the output variation amount per 1s to regulate a rapid change of the manipulated value (MV).

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Output change ratio limiter 510 710 910 1110
CH Output change ratio limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 67 107 147 187

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 or 1 to 1000 (0.1 to 100.0%/s). When 0 is set, the output variation amount is not regulated.

Ex.
When the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas
When 'CH1 Output change ratio limiter' (Un\G510) has been set to 10 (1.0%/s) and the sampling period is 500ms, an output
value changes by 0.5% per 500ms. When the sampling period is 250ms, an output value changes by 0.2% or 0.3% per
250ms. Thus, even though the manipulated value (MV) rapidly changes by 50%, the variation amount is regulated to 1%/s.
Thus, even though the manipulated value (MV) rapidly changes by 50%, the variation amount is regulated to 1%/s.
(1)

100%
Manipulated
value (MV) 50%
80%
50% increase
Manipulated value
(MV)
50%
0.5%

500ms

0%

Set value (SV)

(1) When 'CH1 Output change ratio limiter' (Un\G510) has been set to 10 (1.0%/s)

■Two-position control
The setting is ignored.

■Manual control
The setting is enabled.

■At the execution of the auto tuning

The setting is enabled. However, when the output change ratio limiter setting is changed during the auto tuning, appropriate
PID constants may not be calculated. Therefore, adjusting the output variation amount during the auto tuning is not
recommended.

■Default value
The default value is 0.

APPX
146 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Upper limit setting limiter
Set the upper limit value of the set value (SV).

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Upper limit setting limiter 511 711 911 1111
CH Upper limit setting limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 76 116 156 196

■Setting range
The settings range depends on the type of inputs used.
• Internal temperature inputs: Lower limit setting limiter +1 to input range upper limit
• Internal micro voltage inputs: Lower limit setting limiter +1 to scaling range upper limit
• External inputs: Lower limit setting limiter +1 to external input range upper limit
Configure the settings that satisfy the following conditions.
• 'CH1 Lower limit setting limiter' (Un\G512) < 'CH1 Upper limit setting limiter' (Un\G511)
When the above conditions are not satisfied, CH Upper/lower limit setting limiter error (error code: 1A1H) occurs.
(1) (2)

Input lower limit Input upper limit

Set value (SV) setting range

(1) 'CH1 Lower limit setting limiter' (Un\G512)

(2) 'CH1 Upper limit setting limiter' (Un\G511)

■Setting unit
The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in 'CH1 Decimal point position' (Un\G400). (Page 128 CH1
A
Decimal point position)
• No decimal point (0): Set a value in increments of 1 (or digit).
• If there is 1 digit (1) past the decimal point: Set a value (the value multiplied by 10) in increments of 0.1 ().

■Default value
The default value is 1300.

CH1 Lower limit setting limiter

Set the lower limit value of the set value (SV).

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Lower limit setting limiter 512 712 912 1112
CH Lower limit setting limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 77 117 157 197

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 147
 ■Setting range
The settings range depends on the type of inputs used.
• Internal temperature inputs: Input range lower limit to upper limit setting limiter -1
• Internal low voltage: Scaling range lower limit to upper limit setting limiter -1
• External inputs: External input range lower limit to upper limit setting limiter -1

■Setting unit
For the setting unit, refer to the following.
Page 147 Setting unit

■Default value
The default value is -100.

CH1 Setting change rate limiter

Sets the set value (SV) change rate per minute when changing the set value (SV). This setting can regulate a rapid change of
the manipulated value (MV).

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Setting change rate limiter 513 713 913 1113
CH Setting change rate limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 73 113 153 193

■Setting range
0 to 1000 (span*1 0.1 to 100.0%). When 0 is set, this setting is disabled.
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Default value
Set to disabled (0).

CH1 Normal/Reverse operation setting

Select whether to use CH1 with normal operations or reverse operations.
Select normal operations for the cooling control. Select reverse operations for the heating control.
For details on the normal/reverse operation selection function, refer to the following.
Page 31 Normal/Reverse Operation Selection Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Normal Reverse Operation setting 515 715 915 1115
CH Normal Reverse Operation setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 75 115 155 195

■Setting range
• 0: Normal Operation
• 1: Reverse Operation

■Default value
The default value is Reverse Operation (1).

APPX
148 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting
To prevent chattering of the manipulated value (MV) in the two-position control, set the adjustment sensitivity (dead band) for
the set value (SV).
Temperature
process value (PV)

Set value Adjustment sensitivity

(SV) (dead band)

Time
ON
Manipulated
value (MV) OFF

For details on the two-position control, refer to the following.

Page 25 Control Method

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting 516 716 916 1116
CH Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 69 109 149 189

■Setting range
Set a value within the range of 1 to 100*1 (Span 0.1 to 10.0%).
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

Ex.
When the following values have been set in the buffer memory areas A
• 'CH1 Input range' (Un\G501): 19 (Temperature measuring range: -200.0 to +400.0)
• 'CH1 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting' (Un\G516): 10 (1.0%)
(Span)  (Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting) = (400.0 - (-200.0))  0.01 = 6.0
The dead band is the set value (SV) 3.0.

■Default value
The default value is 10 (1.0%).

CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift

Select the value calculated by a PID operation as the manipulated value (MV) or set the manipulated value (MV) manually.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH AUTO/MAN mode shift 518 718 918 1118
CH AUTO/MAN mode shift (If using FX3 allocation mode) 54 94 134 174

■Setting range
Setting Setting Description
value detail
0 AUTO The AUTO (automatic) mode is activated. The process value (PV) or external input value and the set value (SV) are
compared, and a PID calculation implemented.
1 MAN The MAN (manual) mode is activated. Fix to the value set using "CH1 Manual outputs setting" (Un\G519).

■Default value
The default value is AUTO (0).

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 149
 CH1 Manual output setting
This buffer memory area is used to set the manipulated value (MV) in the MAN mode.
Even though writing of data is executed during control in the AUTO mode, the setting values do not change.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Manual output setting 519 719 919 1119
CH Manual output setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 55 95 135 175

■How to shift the mode

Change the mode with the following buffer memory area.
• 'CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift' (Un\G518) (Page 149 CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift)

■Setting range
-50 to 1050 (-5.0 to 105.0%)

■Enabling the settings

Check that "CH1 event (Un\G429)" in the Manual output settings is b13 before writing.
A value that has been written while MAN mode shift completion flag is OFF will be replaced with the manipulated value (MV)
that the system calculated using the PID operation.

■Default value
The default value is -50 (-5.0%).

CH1 Cooling upper limit output limiter

Set the upper limit value for actually outputting the manipulated value for cooling (MVc) calculated by the cooling and heating
PID operation to an external device. In the auto tuning, this setting is ignored.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Cooling upper limit output limiter 521 721 921 1121
CH Cooling upper limit output limiter (If using FX3 allocation mode) 66 106 146 186

■Setting range
This is 0 to 1050 (0.0 to 105.0%).

In the heating-cooling PID control, the lower limit value is not used. When 'CH1 Lower limit output limiter'
(Un\G509) is set to a value other than 0, an out of setting range error (error code: 1950H) occurs.

■Two-position control
In the two-position control, this setting is disabled.

■Default value
The default value is 1000 (100.0%).

APPX
150 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Cooling control output cycle setting
Sets the cooling control output cycle (time proportional cycle).
Cooling manipulated value (MVc) ON time and OFF time are each as described below.
• ON time: Cooling control output cycle (s)  cooling manipulated value (%)
• OFF time: Cooling control output cycle (s)  (100 - cooling manipulated value (%))
For details, refer to Page 142 CH1 Control output cycle setting.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Cooling control output cycle setting 522 722 922 1122
CH Cooling control output cycle setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 71 111 151 191

CH1 Cooling method setting

Set a cooling control method in the heating-cooling PID control. Select a cooling method suitable for cooling characteristics of
devices.
For details on the cooling method setting function, refer to the following.
Page 34 Cooling Method Setting Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Cooling method setting 523 723 923 1123
CH Cooling method setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 232

■Setting range
• 0: Air cooling
• 1: Water cooling
A
• 2: Cooling gain linear

PID constant calculation results are effected by AT (auto tuning) depending on the settings, so set before
implementing AT (auto tuning).

■Default value
The default value is 0 (air cooling).

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 151
 CH1 Overlap/dead band setting
Configure the overlap/dead band setting. For details on the overlap/dead band function, refer to the following.
Page 33 Overlap/dead Band Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Overlap/dead band setting 524 724 924 1124
CH Overlap/dead band setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 63 103 143 183

■Setting range
Setting value Description
-100 to -1 (span*1 -10.0 to -0.1%) Overlap
0 None
1 to 100 (span*1 0.1 to 10.0%) Dead band

*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Default value
The default value is 0 (None).

CH1 Alert dead band setting

This setting is uses the alert function. This is the common setting for all channel alerts 1 to 4.
For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert dead band setting 531 731 931 1131
Alert dead band setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 233

■Setting range
0 to 100 (span*1 0.0 to 10.0%)
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span

■Default value
Set to 10 (1.0% of span).

APPX
152 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Number of alert delay
Set the number of times to execute sampling to judge an alert. This is the common setting for all channel alerts 1 to 4.
By setting the number of times to execute sampling, when the temperature process value (PV) stays within the alert range
after the temperature process value (PV) has entered the alert range until the number of times to execute sampling exceeds
the number of alert delay, an alert occurs. For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Number of alert delay 532 732 932 1132
Number of alert delay (If using FX3 allocation mode) 234

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 30000 (times).

When 0 (times) has been set, an alert occurs as soon as the temperature process value (PV) goes within the
alert range.

■Default value
The default value is 0 (times).

CH1 Alert 1 mode setting

Set the alert mode of Alert 1. For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area. A
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert 1 mode setting 533 733 933 1133
CH Alert 1 mode setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 209 215 221 227

■Alert mode and alert set value

Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 1 selected in this setting. Set a value in 'CH1 Alert set value 1' (Un\G434).
'CH1 Alert set value 1' (Un\G434) corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 1.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 153
 ■Setting range
The following table lists setting values and setting ranges of alert set values in each alert mode.
Setting Alert mode Setting range of alert set value
value
0 No alert (Alert not implemented) 
1 Upper limit input alert Value within set input range*1
2 Lower limit input alert
3 Upper limit deviation alert - span to + span*2
4 Lower limit deviation alert
5 Upper/lower limit deviation alert 0 to + span*2
6 Within-range alert
7 Upper limit input alert with wait Value within set input range*1
8 Lower limit input alert with wait
9 Upper limit deviation alert with wait - span to + span*2
10 Lower limit deviation alert with wait
11 Upper/lower limit deviation alert with wait 0 to + span*2
12 Upper limit deviation alert with re-wait - span to + span*2
13 Lower limit deviation alert with re-wait
14 Upper/lower limit deviation alert with re-wait 0 to + span*2

*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling range. During external inputs, external input
range.
*2 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Enabling the settings

If changing the settings, turn OFFONOFF the 'Settings change command' (Un\G399, b11) in normal mode to enable the
settings contents.

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Alert 2 mode setting

Set the alert mode of Alert 2. For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert 2 mode setting 534 734 934 1134
CH Alert 2 mode setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 210 216 222 228

■Alert mode and alert set value

Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 2 selected in this setting. Set a value in 'CH1 Alert set value 2' (Un\G435).
'CH1 Alert set value 2' (Un\G435) corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 2.

■Setting range
For the setting range, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Setting range

■Enabling the settings

For enabling the settings, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Enabling the settings

■Default value
For the default value, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Default value

APPX
154 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Alert 3 mode setting
Set the alert mode of Alert 3. For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert 3 mode setting 535 735 935 1135
CH Alert 3 mode setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 211 217 223 229

■Alert mode and alert set value

Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 3 selected in this setting. Set a value in 'CH1 Alert set value 3' (Un\G436).
'CH1 Alert set value 3' (Un\G436) corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 3.

■Setting range
For the setting range, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Setting range

■Enabling the settings

For enabling the settings, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Enabling the settings

■Default value
For the default value, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Default value

CH1 Alert 4 mode setting

Set the alert mode of Alert 4. For details of the alert function, refer to the following.
Page 53 Alert Function
A
■Buffer memory address
The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Alert 4 mode setting 536 736 936 1136
CH Alert 4 mode setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 212 218 224 230

■Alert mode and alert set value

Set an alert set value for the alert mode of Alert 4 selected in this setting. Set a value in 'CH1 Alert set value 4' (Un\G437).
'CH1 Alert set value 4' (Un\G437) corresponds to the alert mode of Alert 4.

■Setting range
For the setting range, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Setting range

■Enabling the settings

For enabling the settings, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Enabling the settings

■Default value
For the default value, refer to the following in CH1 Alert 1 mode setting.
Page 154 Default value

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 155
 CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time
Set the loop disconnection detection judgment time constant.
For loop disconnections, the amount of change to the process value (PV) is detected for each loop disconnection detection
judgment time from when the manipulated value (MV) is either 100% (or the upper limit output limiter) or greater, or 0% (or the
lower limit output limiter) or lower, and the loop disconnection alert turns ON when it is judged that a control loop error has
occurred. For details of the loop disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 60 Loop Disconnection Detection Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Loop disconnection detection judgment time 537 737 937 1137
CH Loop disconnection detection judgment time (If using FX3 allocation 78 118 158 198
mode)

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 7200 (s). Set to 0 to turn OFF this function.

■When executing the auto tuning

A value that is twice as large as the value in 'CH1 Integral time (I) setting' (Un\G432) is automatically set in this setting.

■Default value
The default value is 480 (s).

CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band

Set the non-alert area having the set value (SV) at the center (temperature width in which no loop disconnection is detected)
to prevent accidental alerts of the loop disconnection detection.
For details on the loop disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 60 Loop Disconnection Detection Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Loop disconnection detection dead band 538 738 938 1138
CH Loop disconnection detection dead band (If using FX3 allocation mode) 79 119 159 199

■Setting range
0 to input span*1
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Setting unit
The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in 'CH1 Decimal point position' (Un\G400).
• No decimal point (0): Set a value in increments of 1 ( or digit).
• If there is 1 digit (1) past the decimal point: Set a value (the value multiplied by 10) in increments of 0.1 ().

■Default value
The default value is 0.

APPX
156 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 AT bias
If the process value (PV) does not exceed the set value (SV) during auto tuning implementation, AT bias is set.
For details of the AT (auto tuning) function, refer to the following.
Page 39 AT (Auto Tuning) Bias Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH AT bias 546 746 946 1146
CH AT bias (If using FX3 allocation mode) 74 114 154 194

■Setting range
- span to + span*1 (If span exceeds 32767, the span becomes -322768 to +322767.)
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

■Setting unit
The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in 'CH1 Decimal point position' (Un\G400).
• No decimal point (0): Set a value in increments of 1 ( or digit).
• If there is 1 digit (1) past the decimal point: Set a value (the value multiplied by 10) in increments of 0.1 ().

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Startup tuning setting

Sets stop/implement startup tuning.
For details of the startup tuning function, refer to the following.
Page 40 Startup Tuning Function

■Buffer memory address A

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Startup tuning setting 548 748 948 1148
CH Startup tuning setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 87 127 167 207

■Setting range
• 0: Stop startup tuning
• 1: Implement startup tuning

■Default value
Set to 0 (Stop startup tuning).

Precautions
Auto tuning is implemented if control is started when both the 'auto tuning command' (Un\G399, b4) and 'startup tuning
implementation command' (Un\G548) status is "1".

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 157
 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting
The temperature process value (PV) are smoothed and sudden changes are absorbed by using the primary delay digital filter.

Temperature
If the primary delay digital process value
filter is not set (PV)

Time

Temperature
If the primary delay digital process value
filter is set (PV)

Time

The time for the temperature process value (PV) to change by 63.3% can be set by the primary delay digital filter setting (filter
setting time).

Temperature
process value
If the primary delay digital (PV)
filter is not set

Time

Temperature
process value
(PV)
If the primary delay
digital filter is set

63.3%
Time

(1)

(1) 'CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting' (Un\G563)

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Primary delay digital filter setting 563 763 963 1163
CH Primary delay digital filter setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 72 112 152 192

■Setting range
0 or 1 to 100 (1 to 100s). When 0 is set, the primary delay digital filter processing is not implemented.

■Default value
The default value is 0 (Disable).

APPX
158 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Sensor correction value setting
Set the correction value used when there is an error between a process temperature and the actual temperature. For details
on the sensor correction function, refer to the following.
Page 47 Sensor Correction Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Sensor correction value setting 565 765 965 1165
CH Sensor correction value setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 68 108 148 188

■Setting range
-5000 to +5000 (span*1 -50.00 to +50.00%)
*1 During internal temperature inputs, input range span. During internal micro voltage inputs, scaling span. During external inputs, external
input span.

Ex.
[Condition]
When the input range span is 400 and correction by 2 is required
• 'CH1 Input range' (Un\G501): 0 (Temperature measuring range: -200.0 to +200.0)
[Sensor correction value]
• 'CH1 Sensor correction value setting' (Un\G565): 50 (0.5%)
(Span)  (Sensor correction value setting) = (200.0 - (-200.0)) × 0.5 = 2.0
[Display value]
Displayed value = Process value (PV) + Sensor correction value

Process value (PV) Correction value: 2 C

Display value
Set value (SV)
A
Actual process value

Time

■Setting unit
The value to be set differs depending on the value stored in 'CH1 Decimal point position' (Un\G400).
• No decimal point (0): Set a value in increments of 1 ( or digit).
• If there is 1 digit (1) past the decimal point: Set a value (the value multiplied by 10) in increments of 0.1 ().

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Operation mode setting

Set the operations mode.
• 0: Channel not used.
• 1: Process value (PV) monitoring only is implemented.
• 2: Process value (PV) monitoring + alert operations are implemented. (Alert operations are implemented when the settings
and operations mode command (Un\G399, b1) is 1.)
• 3: Process value (PV) monitoring + alert operations + control are implemented. (Alert operations and control are
implemented when the settings and operations mode command (Un\G399, b1) is 1.)

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 159
 ■Buffer memory address
The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Operation mode setting 590 790 990 1190
Operation mode setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 57 97 137 177

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 3.

■Default value
The default value is 3.

CH1 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit

Sets the display range upper limit during micro voltage inputs.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Micro voltage input scaling upper limit 591 791 991 1191
Micro voltage input scaling upper limit (If using FX3 allocation mode) 80 120 160 200

■Setting range
The setting range is -20000 to +20000.
However, set so that span (upper limit - lower limit absolute values) is 20000 max., and micro voltage input scaling upper limit
is greater than micro voltage input scaling lower limit.

■Default value
Set to 10000 (digits).

CH1 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit

Sets the display range lower limit during micro voltage inputs.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Micro voltage input scaling lower limit 592 792 992 1192
Micro voltage input scaling lower limit (If using FX3 allocation mode) 81 121 161 201

■Setting range
The setting range is -20000 to +20000.
However, set so that span (upper limit - lower limit absolute values) is 20000 max., and micro voltage input scaling upper limit
is greater than micro voltage input scaling lower limit.

■Default value
Set to 0 (digits).

CH1 External input range upper limit

Sets the upper limit of the external input values during external inputs.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
External input range upper limit 593 793 993 1193
External input range upper limit (If using FX3 allocation mode) 82 122 162 202

APPX
160 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
■Setting range
The setting range is -32000 to +32000.
However, set so that external input range upper limit is greater than external input range lower limit.

■Default value
The default value is 10000.

CH1 External input range lower limit

Sets the lower limit of the external input values during external inputs.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
External input range lower limit 594 794 994 1194
External input range lower limit (If using FX3 allocation mode) 83 123 163 203

■Setting range
The setting range is -32000 to +32000.
However, set so that external input range upper limit is greater than external input range lower limit.

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 External output range upper limit

Sets the upper limit of the external output values during external outputs.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
External output range upper limit 595 795 995 1195
A
External output range upper limit (If using FX3 allocation mode) 84 124 164 204

■Setting range
The setting range is -32000 to +32000.
However, set so that external output range upper limit is greater than external output range lower limit.

■Default value
The default value is 10000.

CH1 External output range lower limit

Sets the lower limit of the external output values during external outputs.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
External output range lower limit 596 796 996 1196
External output range lower limit (If using FX3 allocation mode) 85 125 165 205

■Setting range
The setting range is -32000 to +32000.
However, set so that external output range upper limit is greater than external output range lower limit.

■Default value
The default value is 0.

CH1 Transistor output functions selection

Sets the transistor output functions.

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 161
 ■Buffer memory address
The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
External output range lower limit 597 797 997 1197
External output range lower limit (If using FX3 allocation mode) 86 126 166 206

■Setting range
The setting range is 0 to 7.
For details, refer to Page 52 Transistor Outputs Selection Function.

■Enabling the settings

If changing the settings, turn OFFONOFF the 'Settings change command' (Un\G399, b11) in normal mode to enable the
settings contents.

■Default value
The default value is 0.

Heater disconnection/output OFF-time current error detection delay count

Set the limit value for consecutive heater disconnection detections and output off-time current error detections so that the
number of errors exceeding the limit value triggers an alert judgment. This is the common setting for all channels.
For details on the heater disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 62 Heater Disconnection Detection Function
For details on the output off-time current error detection function, refer to the following.
Page 62 Output OFF-time Current Error Detection Function

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Heater disconnection/output OFF-time current error detection delay count 2000
Heater disconnection/output OFF-time current error detection delay count (If 235
using FX3 allocation mode)

■Setting range
The setting range is 3 to 255 (times).

■Default value
The default value is 3 (times).

CT monitor method switching

Set the method for executing the heater current measurement. This is the common setting for all channels.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CT monitor method switching 2002
CT monitor method switching (If using FX3 allocation mode) 238

■Setting range
• 0: ON current/OFF current
• 1: ON current
When ON/OFF current (0) is set, the present current value of the current sensor (CT) is process.
When ON current (1) is set, the current value of the heater being OFF is fixed as the current value of the heater previously
being ON.

■Default value
The default value is ON/OFF current (0).

APPX
162 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting
Sets the value if a current error is detected when a disconnection is detected and outputs are OFF.
• A heater disconnection alert occurs if the heater current process value while control outputs are ON is below the heater
disconnection alert settings. ('Event' (Un\G429) b9 turns ON.)
• A current error alert occurs when outputs are OFF if the heater current process value when control outputs are OFF is the
heater disconnection setting or greater. ('Event' (Un\G429) b10 turns ON.)
For details on the heater disconnection detection function, refer to the following.
Page 62 Heater Disconnection Detection Function
For details on the output off-time current error detection function, refer to the following.
Page 62 Output OFF-time Current Error Detection Function

Precautions
If external outputs are selected using control mode switching, the heater disconnection alert function is disabled.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Heater disconnection alert setting 2004 2007 2010 2013
CH Heater disconnection alert setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 53 93 133 173

■Setting range
0 to 1000 (0.0 to 100.0 A).
When 0 is set, heater disconnection detections and output off-time current error detections are not executed.

■Default value
The default value is 0 (A).

CH1 Heater current process value A

Stores the heater current value detected by the temperature control module.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH Heater current process value 2030 2031 2032 2033
CH Heater current process value (If using FX3 allocation mode) 21 22 23 24

Precautions
If control mode comprising external outputs using control mode switching is selected,*1 CT inputs are not processed. 0 is
normally stored in the heater current process value.
*1 If control mode is 2, 3, 6, 7, all channels are normally 0.
If control mode is 4 or 5, only channels 2 and 4 are normally 0.

CH1 CT ratio setting

Set the number of second-winding (turns) of the current sensor (CT) to be connected. This is the common setting for all
channels if using FX3 allocation mode.

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
CH CT ratio setting 2062 2063 2064 2065
CH CT ratio setting (If using FX3 allocation mode) 239

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 163
 ■Setting range
The setting range is 1 to 9999.
Set the value to satisfy the following.
(Max. process current value (effective value)*1  1.1  CT ratio setting (CT secondary winding count used))  0.1377
*1 Max. process current value (effective value)  100 A

Ex.
If CT ratio setting is 800, and the max. process current value (effective value) is 100 A, the left hand side = 0.1375, and the
conditions are satisfied, so measuring up to 100 A is possible.
• Current sensor (CT) reference examples
CT model name CT ratio set value
CTL-6-P-H/CTL-6-S-H/CTL-6-P 800
CTL-12-S36-8/CTL-12L-8 800
CTL-12-S56-10/CTL-12-S36-10 1000

■Default value
The default value is 800.

Error history
Up to 16 errors that occurred in the module are recorded.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Un\G3600 Error code
Un\G3601 First 2 digits of date Last 2 digits of date
Un\G3602 Month Day
Un\G3603 Time Minute
Un\G3604 Second Day of the week
Un\G3605 Millisecond (upper) Millisecond (lower)
Un\G3606
…

System area

Un\G3609

Item Stored contents Storage example*1

First two digits of the year/last Stored in BCD code. 2014H
two digits of the year
Month/day 630H
Hour/minute 1234H
Second 56H
Day of the week One of the following values is stored in BCD code. 1H
Sunday: 0, Monday: 1, Tuesday: 2, Wednesday: 3, Thursday: 4, Friday: 5, Saturday: 6
Millisecond (upper) Stored in BCD code. 7H
Millisecond (lower) 89H

*1 Value stored when an error occurs at [Link].789 on Monday, June 30, 2014

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Error history 3600 to 3759
Error history (If using FX3 allocation mode) 3600 to 3759

APPX
164 Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas
Alarm history
Up to 16 alarms that occurred in the module are recorded.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
Un\G3760 Alarm code
Un\G3761 First 2 digits of date Last 2 digits of date
Un\G3762 Month Day
Un\G3763 Time Minute
Un\G3764 Second Day of the week
Un\G3765 Millisecond (upper) Millisecond (lower)
Un\G3766
System area
…

Un\G3769

Item Stored contents Storage example*1

First two digits of the year/last Stored in BCD code. 2014H
two digits of the year
Month/day 630H
Hour/minute 1234H
Second 56H
Day of the week One of the following values is stored in BCD code. 1H
Sunday: 0, Monday: 1, Tuesday: 2, Wednesday: 3, Thursday: 4, Friday: 5, Saturday: 6
Millisecond (upper) Stored in BCD code. 7H
Millisecond (lower) 89H

*1 Value stored when an alarm occurs at [Link].789 on Monday, June 30, 2014

■Buffer memory address

The following table shows the buffer memory address of this area.
Buffer memory name CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
Alarm history 3760 to 3919
Alarm history (If using FX3 allocation mode) 3760 to 3919

APPX
Appendix 4 Buffer Memory Areas 165
 Appendix 5 PID
This section describes PID.

PID operations
The temperature control module can implement the process-value inexact differential PID control.

Operation method and operational expression

The process-value inexact differential PID control is an operation method in which a primary delay filter has been put on the
input of a derivative action and high-frequency noise has been eliminated to execute PID operations on the deviation (E).

■Algorithm of the process-value inexact differential PID control

The following figure shows the algorithm of the process-value inexact differential PID control.
Disturbance D
Temperature control module

Control response parameter

Control target
Set value Slow + 1 +
KP(1 + ) G(s)
(SV) Normal TI · s
- E -
Fast Manipulated value
(MV)

KP · TD · s
1 + η · TD · s

KP: Proportional gain η: Derivative

Temperature
TI: Integral time s: Laplace transform process value (PV)
TD : Derivative time E: Deviation

■Operational expression
The following figure shows the operational expression of the temperature control module.

τ ηTD TD
MVn = KP En + E +I + D - PVn - PVn-1
TI n n-1 τ + ηTD n-1 τ + ηTD

E: Deviation (SV-PV)
τ: Sampling cycle
MV: PID control in process-value incomplete derivation output
PV: Process value
KP: Proportional gain
TI: Integral time
TD: Derivative time
η: Derivative
I: Integral value
D: Derivative value

The PID control in process-value derivation is an operation method in which the temperature process value
(PV) is used as a derivative term in a PID operation. No deviation is used for the derivative term, drastic output
changes due to a derivative action can be reduced when the deviation varies along with a set value change.

APPX
166 Appendix 5 PID
Actions of the temperature control module
The temperature control module implements PID operations with normal operation and reverse operation.

Normal Operation
In a normal operation, the manipulated value (MV) increases when the temperature process value (PV) is larger than the set
value (SV). A normal operation is used for cooling control.

Manipulated
value (MV)

Process value (PV)

Reverse Operation
In a reverse operation, the manipulated value (MV) increases when the temperature process value (PV) is smaller than the
set value (SV). A Reverse Operation is used for heating control.

Manipulated
value (MV)

Process value (PV)

APPX
Appendix 5 PID 167
 Proportional action (P action)
A proportional action is used to obtain the manipulated value (MV) proportional to the deviation (difference between the set
value (SV) and the temperature process value (PV)).

Proportional gain
In a proportional action, the relation between changes in the deviation (E) and the manipulated value (MV) can be expressed
using the following formula:
MV=KPE
KP is a proportional constant and is called proportional gain. The manipulated value (MV) varies within the range of -5.0% to
105.0%.
The following shows the difference of the actions depending on the proportional gain KP.
Condition Proportional action
When the proportional gain KP is small A control action slows down.
When the proportional gain KP is large The control action accelerates, but the temperature process value (PV) tends
to fluctuate around the set value.

The following figure shows a proportional action of step responses of when the deviation (E) is a fixed value.

Deviation (E) E
Time

Manipulated
value (MV) KP • E

Time

Offset
The certain amount of an error between the temperature process value (PV) and the set value (SV) is called an offset
(remaining deviation). In a proportional action, an offset (remaining deviation) is generated.

Set Set
value Offset value Offset
(SV) (SV)
Temperature process value (PV) Temperature process value (PV)
Time Time

APPX
168 Appendix 5 PID
Integral action (I action)
An integral action that continuously changes the manipulated value (MV) to eliminate the deviation (E) when there is any. The
offset caused by a proportional action can be eliminated.
In an integral action, the time taken for the manipulated value (MV) of the integral action after the generation of the deviation
(E) to become the manipulated value (MV) of a proportional action is called integral time and expressed as TI. The following
shows the difference of the actions depending on the integral time TI.
Condition Integral action
When the integral time TI is short The integral effect becomes large and the time to eliminate the offset
becomes short. However, the temperature process value (PV) tends to
fluctuate around the set value.
When the integral time TI is long The integral effect becomes small and the time to eliminate the offset
becomes long.

The following figure shows an integral action of step responses of when the deviation (E) is a fixed value.

Deviation (E) E
Time

Manipulated value of proportional operation +

differential operation

Manipulated value of differential operation

Manipulated KP • E Manipulated value of proportional operation

value (MV)
TI

Time
A
An integral action is used as a PI action in combination with a proportional action, or a PID action in combination with a
proportional action and a derivative action. An integral action cannot be used by itself.

APPX
Appendix 5 PID 169
 Derivative action (D action)
A derivative action adds the manipulated value (MV) proportional to the variation rate to eliminate the deviation (E) when it
occurs. A derivative action can prevent the control target from changing significantly due to noise.
In a derivative action, the time taken for the manipulated value (MV) of the derivative action after the generation of the
1
deviation (E) to become the value obtained by multiplying 1 ×e- η by the manipulated value (MV) of a proportional action is
η
called derivative time and expressed as TD.
Condition Derivative action
When the derivative time TD is short The derivative effect becomes small.
When the derivative time TD is long The derivative effect becomes large. However, the temperature process value
(PV) tends to fluctuate around the set value in short cycles.

The following figure shows a derivative of step responses of when the deviation (E) is a fixed value.

Deviation E
(E)
Time

(1)

- 1
Manipulated (2) 1 η
KP E × η × e
value (MV)
TD
KPE

Time

(1) Manipulated value (MV) in a derivative operation

(2) Manipulated value (MV) in a proportional operation

A derivative action is used as a PD action in combination with a proportional action, or PID action in combination with a
proportional action and an integral action. A derivative action cannot be used by itself.

PID action
A PID action implements control using the manipulated value (MV) calculated by adding the proportional action, integral
action, and derivative action. The following figure shows a PID action of step responses of when the deviation (E) is a fixed
value.

Deviation
(E)
Time

PID operation

PI operation I operation
P operation
Manipulated
value (MV) D operation
Time

APPX
170 Appendix 5 PID
MEMO

APPX
Appendix 5 PID 171
 INDEX

A CH1 Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) for output

with another (external) analog module . . . . . . . .133
Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 CH1 Manipulated value for heating (MVh) . . . . . .129
Alert with re-wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 CH1 Manipulated value for heating (MVh) for output
Alert with wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 with another (external) analog module . . . . . . . .132
Automatic setting at input range change . . . . . . 120 CH1 Manual output setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Automatic setting monitor at input range change CH1 Micro voltage input scaling lower limit . . . . .160
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 CH1 Micro voltage input scaling upper limit . . . . .160
CH1 Normal/Reverse operation setting . . . . . . . .148
C CH1 Number of alert delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
CH1 Operation mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Cascade bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 CH1 Output change ratio limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Cascade gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 CH1 Overlap/dead band setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Cascade monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 CH1 Primary delay digital filter setting . . . . . . . . .158
Cascade ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 CH1 Proportional band (P) setting . . . . . . . . . . .135
CH1 Adjustment sensitivity (dead band) setting CH1 Sensor correction value setting . . . . . . . . . .159
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 CH1 Set value (SV) monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
CH1 Alert 1 mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 CH1 Set value (SV) setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
CH1 Alert 2 mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 CH1 Setting change rate limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
CH1 Alert 3 mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 CH1 Startup tuning setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
CH1 Alert 4 mode setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 CH1 Temperature process value (PV). . . . . . . . .129
CH1 Alert dead band setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 CH1 Temperature process value (PV) for input with
CH1 Alert definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 another (external) analog module . . . . . . . . . . . .140
CH1 Alert set value 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 CH1 Temperature rise completion range setting. .143
CH1 Alert set value 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 CH1 Temperature rise completion soak time setting
CH1 Alert set value 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
CH1 Alert set value 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 CH1 Temperature rise judgment flag . . . . . . . . .130
CH1 AT bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 CH1 Transistor output flag (Control output flag) . .131
CH1 AUTO/MAN mode shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 CH1 Transistor output functions selection . . . . . .161
CH1 Control output cycle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 CH1 Upper limit output limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
CH1 Control response parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 143 CH1 Upper limit setting limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
CH1 Cooling control output cycle setting . . . . . . 151 Control mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
CH1 Cooling method setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Control mode selection monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
CH1 Cooling proportional band (Pc) setting . . . . 140 CT monitor method switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
CH1 Cooling transistor output flag. . . . . . . . . . . 133
CH1 Cooling upper limit output limiter . . . . . . . . 150
CH1 CT ratio setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 D
CH1 Decimal point position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
CH1 Derivative time (D) setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
CH1 Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
CH1 External input range lower limit . . . . . . . . . 161 E
CH1 External input range upper limit . . . . . . . . . 160 Error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
CH1 External output range lower limit . . . . . . . . 161 Error occurrence address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
CH1 External output range upper limit . . . . . . . . 161
CH1 Heater current process value . . . . . . . . . . 163
CH1 Heater disconnection alert setting . . . . . . . 163 F
CH1 Heating control output cycle setting . . . . . . 142 Firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
CH1 Heating proportional band (Ph) setting . . . . 136 Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
CH1 Heating transistor output flag . . . . . . . . . . 131
CH1 Heating upper limit output limiter . . . . . . . . 145
CH1 Input range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 H
CH1 Integral time (I) setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Heater disconnection/output OFF-time current error
CH1 Loop disconnection detection dead band . . 156
detection delay count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
CH1 Loop disconnection detection judgment time
Heating/cooling PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
CH1 Lower limit output limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
CH1 Lower limit setting limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 I
CH1 Manipulated value (MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Input alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
CH1 Manipulated value (MV) for output with another
(external) analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
CH1 Manipulated value for cooling (MVc) . . . . . 133

172
L
Latest address of alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Latest address of error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Latest alarm code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Latest error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Lower limit deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

M
Module information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

O
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

P
P control . . . . ......................... 27
PD control . . . ......................... 28
PI control . . . . ......................... 27
PID control . . . ......................... 28

S
Standard PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SV tracking selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

T
Two-position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

U
Upper limit deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Upper/lower limit deviation alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

W I
Within-range alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

173
 REVISIONS
Revision date Revision Description
April 2017 A First Edition
March 2019 B ■Added or modified parts
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, Section 4.34, Appendix 4,
TRADEMARKS
October 2019 C ■Added models
FX5UJ CPU module
■Added or modified parts
RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, Section 2.1, 2.3, Chapter 3, Appendix 4
March 2020 D ■Added or modified parts
Appendix 4, TRADEMARKS
June 2021 E ■Modified part
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
April 2022 F ■Modified parts
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS,
RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, Section 2.1, Chapter 3, Section 4.29, Appendix 2

Japanese manual number: SH-081798-F

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot
be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

 2017 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

174
WARRANTY
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty 2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation
Range of production
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for
the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the seven (7) years after production of the product is
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall discontinued.
be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Discontinuation of production shall be notified with
Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
required onsite at domestic or overseas location, (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available
expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the after production is discontinued.
customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held
responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or 3. Overseas service
testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local
module. overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one
year after the date of purchase or delivery to a
secondary loss from warranty liability
designated place. Note that after manufacture and Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall
shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution not be liable for compensation to:
period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the
warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) responsibility of Mitsubishi.
months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user
exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. by Failures of Mitsubishi products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether
[Gratis Warranty Range] foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the compensation for damages to products other than
usage state, usage methods and usage environment, Mitsubishi products.
etc., which follow the conditions and precautions, (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site
etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
and caution labels on the product. 5. Changes in product specifications
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical
charged for in the following cases. documents are subject to change without prior notice.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or 6. Product application
handling, carelessness or negligence by the
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable
user. Failure caused by the user's hardware or
controller, the usage conditions shall be that the
software design.
application will not lead to a major accident even if
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications,
any problem or fault should occur in the
etc., to the product by the user.
programmable controller device, and that backup and
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside
user's device, Failure that could have been of the device for any problem or fault.
avoided if functions or structures, judged as
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been
necessary in the legal safety measures the user's
designed and manufactured for applications in general
device is subject to or as necessary by industry
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public
standards, had been provided.
could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
4. Failure that could have been avoided if other power plants operated by respective power
consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) companies, and applications in which a special quality
designated in the instruction manual had been assurance system is required, such as for railway
correctly serviced or replaced. companies or public service purposes shall be excluded
5. Relay failure or output contact failure caused by from the programmable controller applications.
usage beyond the specified life of contact In addition, applications in which human life or property
(cycles). that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
6. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such medical applications, incineration and fuel devices,
as fires or abnormal voltages, and failure caused manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded
wind and water damage. from the programmable controller range of applications.
7. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by However, in certain cases, some applications may be
scientific technology standards at time of possible, providing the user consults their local
shipment from Mitsubishi. Mitsubishi representative outlining the special
8. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility requirements of the project, and providing that all
of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the parties concerned agree to the special circumstances,
user. solely at the user's discretion.
(3) Mitsubishi shall have no responsibility or liability for any
problems involving programmable controller trouble and
system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized
access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.

175
 TRADEMARKS
Anywire and AnyWireASLINK are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Anywire Corporation.
The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective companies.
In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

176 SH(NA)-081799ENG-F
Manual number: SH(NA)-081799ENG-F
Model: FX5-U-LC-E
Model code: 09R570

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.

Specifications subject to change without notice.